JP2022153844A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: Display of "0 times" up to a ceiling is shown in a ceiling arrival counter 81c by completion of execution of a variation display of a second special pattern, and 1 is subtracted from a state in Fig. 58(c), thus reaching a ceiling and shifting to "a normal pattern low-probability time-shortening state". For this reason, although a main display rightward shooting instruction 89 for suggesting a rightward shooting game is displayed, a performance rightward shooting instruction 81d is not displayed in a center part of a main display area Dm since a variation display of a first special pattern is under execution in a center part of the main display area Dm of a third pattern display device 81.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and wins a winning game in the second game state. Also, there are those that are configured to be able to generate the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295672 A

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a display means. A gaming machine comprising predetermined effect executing means capable of executing an effect, wherein the predetermined effect executing means is a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a game result suggestive effect capable of suggesting a game result to a player; A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect whose occurrence condition is different from the game result suggesting effect, and the game result suggesting effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect. A continuation means for continuing the performance, and a standby for the start of the specific performance at least during execution of the game result suggestive performance when a condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggestive performance. The specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect whose start is on standby by the specific effect waiting means at least on the condition that the game result suggesting effect is completed. configured to

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the information obtaining means capable of obtaining the predetermined information, the determination means capable of determining the predetermined information obtained by the information obtaining means, and the display means capable of executing a predetermined effect. a predetermined effect executing means, wherein the predetermined effect executing means includes suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a game result suggestive effect capable of suggesting a game result to a player; and the game result suggestive effect. and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect with different occurrence conditions, and a continuation for continuing the game result suggestive effect when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggestive effect. means, and specific effect standby means for waiting for the start of the specific effect at least during execution of the game result suggesting effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect. and the specific performance executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance whose start is being waited by the specific performance standby means at least on the condition that the game result suggesting performance is completed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot random number table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table. In each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol winning probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol fluctuation time, the second special symbol It is the list which explained fluctuation time and the right-handed right-handed propriety. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge mode in each game state, and the jackpot type etc. which were elected. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 1. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is , and a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table; (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table of the stop pattern table; , and a diagram schematically showing an example of an F table of a stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table is. In the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start opening, the upper second start opening, and the lower second start opening, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the first special symbol It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the drive timing of the solenoid for normal electric service and the solenoid for the big winning opening opening/closing plate. In the left-handed game at the time of "normal game state", the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols in the low probability state of special symbols reaches 900 times due to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability time shortening state is reached. It is a timing chart when rushing. In the left-handed game in the "normal game state", during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is 900 due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is a timing chart in the case of reaching the time and entering the low probability time shortening state. In the right-handed game during "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start opening, the upper second start opening, the lower second start opening, and the normal A timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display of symbols, the variable display of special symbol 1 and the variable display of special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the solenoid for normal electric service and the solenoid for opening and closing the big winning opening. is. In the right-handed game during the "latency probability fluctuation state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start opening, the upper second start opening, and the lower second start opening, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the special symbol 1 It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the solenoid for normal electric service and the solenoid for the big winning opening opening/closing plate. It is the figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot opening table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit open table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal pattern, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal pattern fluctuation time table, (c) is normal FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of an electric power release table; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of a first pending information storage area, a first execution information storage area, and a second pending information storage area and a second execution information storage area; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing the other stopping process executed by the MPU in the main control device; It is a flow chart which shows time saving counting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing ceiling reaching counting processing executed by an MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing processing during the opening of the big winning opening executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a small winning opening and closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing processing during small hit opening executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing normal electric duty control processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a hitting instruction display process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device; FIG. It shows the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variable effect of the special symbol, (a) shows the special symbol until reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state". In a state where the number of executions of the variable display is two more times, it is a diagram showing a state in which only the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and (b) shows the state of (a) to the first It is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of special symbols is finished and the number of executions of variable display of special symbols until reaching the ceiling is reduced to one more time. The next variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. In (d), from the state of (c), only the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the ceiling is reached, and the main display right FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a hitting instruction and an effect hitting instruction are displayed; (a) to (d) show, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing the transition, (a) is a state in the "normal game state", in a state where the number of times of executing the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more, only the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is a diagram showing a state in progress, (b), from the state of (a), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is It is a diagram showing a state that has been reduced to one more time, (c) is, from the state of (b), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, in the main display area Dm "super reach" effect mode is being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started, and (d) shows only the variable display of the second special symbol from the state of (c). is finished, the ball reaches the ceiling, and the state shifts to the ``normal figure low probability time shortening state'', where only the main display right-handed instruction is displayed, and the performance-oriented hitting instruction is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state", a) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect result that is a failure in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode executed in the variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 58(d) is displayed. In (b), from the state of (a), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode that has been executed in the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, and the third symbol that is lost is the main display area. It is a diagram showing the state displayed in Dm, (c), from the state of (b), in the main display area Dm, in the main display area Dm, it is reported that it has reached the ceiling and has shifted to the "normal map low probability time shortened state" and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the performance hitting instruction is being executed, and (d) is a transition notification from the state (c) to the “normal figure low probability time shortening state” and the performance hitting method It is the figure which showed the state where the instruction|indication was complete|finished and the 3rd design displayed in this "general pattern low probability time reduction state" switched from the 1st special design to the 2nd special design. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling reach|attainment alerting|reporting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. Fig. 67(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state" in the conventional pachinko machine. is a diagram showing a state in which only the first special symbol variation display is being executed in a state where the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is two more times during the "normal game state". FIG. 67(b) is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. FIG. 67(c) shows that the next variable display of the first special symbol starts from the state of FIG. 67(b) and reaches the ceiling in the central part of the main display area Dm. 67(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is also started, and FIG. During execution, only the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the ceiling is reached, and the state shifts to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' and the right-handed instruction for the main display and the instruction for the production method are displayed. It is a figure showing. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". 68(a) is a state in which only the first special symbol variable display is being executed in the state of the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the special symbol variable display until reaching the ceiling is two more. FIG. 68(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. FIG. 68(c) shows the state of FIG. 68(b), the next variable display of the first special symbol starts, and reaches the ceiling in the central part of the main display area Dm 68(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the display of the second special symbol is also started, and FIG. 68(d) shows the state of the ceiling During the execution of the arrival notification effect, only the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the ceiling is reached, the state shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", and only the right-handed instruction for the main display is displayed, and the hitting for the effect FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which direction instructions are not executed; In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". In 69(a), from the state of FIG. 68(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed, and the main display in FIGS. 68(a) to 68(d). It is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the area Dm is erased, FIG. 69(b) is a variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 69(a). 69(c) shows the state of FIG. 69(b), the ceiling reaching notification effect is finished, the ceiling is reached, and the transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" It is a diagram showing a state in which it is notified that it has been done, and the performance hitting instruction is being executed, and FIG. 69(d) shows the state of FIG. The transition notification and the production hitting instruction are completed, and the third pattern displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. be. During the "normal game state" in the third embodiment, the special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling by the variable display and shifts to the "general pattern low probability time reduction state", and the special that reaches the ceiling It is a timing chart when the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed in parallel at the timing when the variable display of the symbol 1 ends. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling reach|attainment notification extension process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, during the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation performance of the first special symbol FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 73(a) shows the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is one more time in the "normal game state". and the variable display of the second special symbol are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, FIG. From the state of (a), only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and reaches the ceiling, and is a diagram showing a state of transition to "general figure low probability time shortening state", Fig. 73 (c) FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the reaching-the-ceiling notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed, and FIG. 73(d) is a state from the state of FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the effect hitting instruction is finished and the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation performance of the first special symbol FIG. 74(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 74(a) shows the first special symbol in the state where the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is one more time in the "normal game state". and the variable display of the second special symbol are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, FIG. From the state of (a), only the variable display of the first special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling, and shows the state of transitioning to "general pattern low probability time shortening state", FIG. 74 (c) and FIG. 74(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously being executed from the state of FIG. 74(b), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being continuously executed. . In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation performance of the first special symbol FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. 74(d), and FIG. 75(b) 75(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the reaching-the-ceiling notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed, and FIG. 75(c) is a view of FIG. 75(b). It is the figure which showed the state from which the instruction|indication of how to play for production|presentation was complete|finished from the state, and the variable display of the 2nd special design started execution. It is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 2 during the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state". It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing ceiling reaching standby processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment FIG. 81(a) shows the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is two more times during the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing a state in which the display is being executed in parallel, and FIG. 81(b) shows that only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. 81(a), and reaches the ceiling. FIG. 81(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol has been reduced to one more time, and FIG. 81(c) shows the next variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 81(b). is started, and FIG. 81(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the main display right-handed instruction is displayed after reaching the "normal map low probability time shortening state". It shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment FIG. 82(a) shows that the ceiling arrival standby effect is completed from the state of FIG. FIG. 82B is a diagram showing a state in which a command is being executed, and FIG. 82B shows a shift notification and performance impact from the state of FIG. The direction instruction is completed, and the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm during the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is shown to have switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol starts to be executed from the state of FIG. 82(b). During the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal low probability time reduction state", but during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 1, It is a timing chart in the case of a big hit in the variable display of the special symbol 2. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling reach|attainment effect switching process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86(a) shows the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is one more. It is a diagram showing a state in which all displays are stopped, and FIG. 86(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. FIG. 86(c) is a diagram showing the state being executed, and FIG. 86(c) starts the variable display that will win the jackpot of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 86(b), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted, and FIG.86(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol jackpot is stopped from the state of FIG.86(c). It shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 87(a) shows the variable display of special symbols in the "universal pattern high probability time reduction state" shifted from the state of FIG. is a diagram showing a state in which the number of times of execution is 99 times, and FIG. 87(b) shows that the variable display of the second special symbol stops from the state of FIG. 87(a), and the time saving end condition is satisfied FIG. 87(c) shows a state in which the state is shifted to the "normal game state" by pressing the "normal game state". It is the figure which showed the state switched from the 2nd special design to the 1st special design. It is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal pattern of the sixth embodiment, (b) schematically shows an example of a normal pattern fluctuation time table of the sixth embodiment FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing an example of an ordinary electric duty release table according to the sixth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 59, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

To the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64, 71, 71a, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

Also, the variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. For example, the first starting port 64 described later, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (see FIG. 3)) is executed as a trigger, and the pattern (third pattern described later) is predetermined This is an effect in which the player is presented with the result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the winning prize according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed after being time-varying.

Furthermore, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) to be described later are unified. Stage” and “Island Stage” are provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

Here, when the frame button 22 is pressed (for example, switching means) in a situation (for example, the first game situation) where the town stage (for example, the first effect) is selected and executed, an empty stage (for example, When switching to the second effect), a predetermined effect indicating that the stage has been switched (for example, screen darkening, etc.; third effect) is executed, and after the predetermined effect is completed, the stage is shifted to an empty stage (for example, the second game situation ). With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the stage has been switched, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game through an easy-to-understand presentation.

In addition, the "ready-to-win display" means a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4) to be described later stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly divided into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"), Developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element with a higher expected jackpot than the "normal reach" variable element, and similarly "normal reach" variable element Developed and executed, A variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than a variable element of "super reach" is prepared.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the variable effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the variable element of "high-speed change" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed in the variable effect so that the player cannot see it. This is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 . Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Also, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or When it develops into the variable element of "special reach", the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". It may be configured as

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach". , according to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" are executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined.

In addition, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper tray 17 or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower tray 50 to be described later.

Furthermore, in the variable performance of the special symbol, it may be configured to execute a repeated hitting effect (for example, the first effect) for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 . In this case, when the execution lottery for the repeated hit effect is won (for example, the occurrence of the second event), the execution period of the repeated hit effect is set (for example, period setting means), and within the set execution period of the repeated hit effect counts the number of presses of the frame button 22 (for example, the first event) (for example, counting means), and during the execution of the continuous hit effect, the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, the third event). When it is generated), the content of the continuous hit performance displayed until then is changed (finished) (for example, a performance ending means), and a predetermined development performance (for example, a second performance) capable of winning a jackpot is executed. It may be configured as On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won, or if the button is not pressed for the specified number of times, the continuous hitting effect may be continued or the development effect may not be executed. In this development effect, an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the player will win the jackpot may be executed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120 , the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121 , and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , a variable prize winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third pattern occurs, and a first special prize that is one of the third patterns (so-called special patterns). The first start port 64 that triggers the lottery of the symbol, the upper second start port 71 and the lower second start port 71a that trigger the lottery of the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, the second symbol (so-called, A through gate 67 that triggers a lottery for normal symbols), a normal electric gate 72 that allows a ball to enter the lower second starting port 71a by being in an open state, a third symbol display device 81, and a second symbol display device. The variable display device unit 80 and the like having 83 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 .

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the upper second starting opening 71, the lower second starting opening 71a, the ordinary electric terminal 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are made by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 3, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the central part (hereinafter, the act of shooting a ball with momentum hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as a "right-handed game". On the other hand, the act of causing the shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is called a “left-handed game”). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, while the ball can or is likely to enter the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the lower second It is configured such that a ball is difficult or not to enter the starting port 71a. Also, in the right-handed game, while the ball can enter or is likely to enter the upper second start port 71, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the lower second start port 71a, the first start port 64 It is configured so that the ball is difficult to enter or not enter.

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A special pattern provided with a state LED group 37a, a special LED group 37b, and a right-handed notification lamp 37c made up of a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, is provided on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 3). A display device 37 is provided. The special symbol display device 37 displays each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols is referred to as " "dynamic display") is performed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The state LED group 37a displays the balls for which the variation display has not been performed (holding balls ) is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds (hereinafter, a round may be simply referred to as “R”) and an error display are indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combinations of the emitted colors suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

Note that the "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from when the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a that opens and closes the variable prize winning device 65 (to be described later) to separate the number of prize balls in the jackpot is opened until it is closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of one embodiment, when "30 seconds" elapses after the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is started, or when 10 balls win during the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, It is configured to run one "round".

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64. FIG. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 has a dynamic second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a. Is displayed.

Specifically, in the upper LED group 37b1, a dynamic After displaying (in the first embodiment, the uppermost LED in the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (first embodiment , any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In addition, in the lower LED group 37b2, the upper second start port 71 provided on the right side of the game board 13 or the right side of the game board 13 and the lower side of the upper second start port 71 Until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning to the lower second start port 71a elapses, dynamic display (in the first embodiment, from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 After the LEDs are sequentially lit one by one and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment, a total of 64 types of stop patterns are displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs. either) is displayed.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big win, the type (type) of the big win is displayed. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a ball entered into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a is a big win. When it is judged to be a big win in the judgment, the kind of the big win is also judged according to the winning prize openings 64, 71 and 71a, and the variable winning device 65 is driven to open and close according to each big win kind.

As the jackpot type determined in the first embodiment, based on the winning to the first start port 64, "5 round time saving jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time saving A")", "10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable probability A”)” and “10 round probability jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “potential probability A”)” (see FIG. 8A). Moreover, based on the prize-winning to the upper side 2nd starting port 71 or the lower side 2nd starting port 71a, "time reduction A" or "probability A" is prepared (refer FIG.8(b)).

Here, "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not "probability change state", "latency probability change state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" , a state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the probability of winning a normal symbol are in a normal state (that is, a low probability state) and the opening of the normal electrode 72 is short. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than that in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state". The normal pattern hit probability is lower than the time (equivalent to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" and "latency probability fluctuation state"), and the normal electric role 72 is configured to be open for a short time. It is

Although the details will be described later, in the case of the "normal game state", the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower second start port 71a when a so-called right-handed game is played A state in which it is easy to win a prize is sometimes referred to as a "wining assist state"), but is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. It should be noted that, in the "normal game state", if a ball fired in a right-handed game is detected (for example, detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67, etc.), it means that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. In order to suggest to the player and the people involved in the hall, a predetermined warning (for example, voice output of "Please return to the left-handed game" or display of "Please return to the left-handed game" on the third symbol display device 81 etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-recommended right-handed game in the "normal game state", and to realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the winning probability of the special symbols is low, a predetermined number of times ("900 times" in the first embodiment) are continuously won in the dynamic display. If not, as a relief measure for the player, although the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbols and the probability of winning the normal symbols are in a low probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. Equipped with a function (so-called ceiling function) that generates a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" that lengthens the time (hereinafter, when the probability of winning a special pattern is low probability, in dynamic display " 900 times” to enter the “normal low probability time reduction state” without winning the jackpot continuously is called “ceiling reach”, and when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, “ceiling reach” ” may be referred to as “the number of times the ceiling is reached”).

Then, the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" described later, but the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. As the probability of winning increases, the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter, variable display of normal symbols is referred to as “variable display”) time is shortened, and the opening time of normal electric role 72 is increased (hereinafter, normal symbols As the probability of winning increases, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is extended. In this "normal figure high probability time shortening state", the ordinary electric member 72 provided above the lower second start port 71a in front view becomes easy to be in an open state, and the ball fired in the right-handed game A state is created in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71a.

That is, in the "general figure high probability time shortening state", although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the normal symbol is likely to be derived in a short time than the "normal game state", This is a state in which the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", since it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the lower second start port 71a, the prize ball based on the prize to the lower second start port 71a (For example, 1 ball/winning prize) can be obtained and the game can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is a predetermined number of times (100 in the first embodiment) after the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is started. times), until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is in a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state".

In addition, in the "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state", "probability change state" described later or "latency probability change state" described later, the ball was shot by a left-handed game is detected (for example, detection of winning of a ball into the first starting hole 64), a predetermined alarm is issued to suggest to the player and hall officials that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. (For example, it is configured to output a voice saying "Please hit right" or display "Please hit right"). By configuring in this way, the non-recommended left-handed game continues in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" It is possible to suppress the execution of the game, and realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

Then, the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" described later, and the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. While the hit probability is in a state as low as the "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is "probability fluctuation state" and "normal state". High Probability Time Shortening State" (Hereinafter, while the probability of winning the normal pattern is low, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened. may be referred to as "low-probability time-saving function".In addition, "high-probability time-saving function" and "low-probability time-saving function" may be collectively referred to as "time-saving function".) Therefore, a ball shot in a right-handed game easily enters the lower second start opening 71a.

That is, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", although the jackpot probability of the special pattern and the probability of the normal pattern are equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit due to the variable display of the normal symbol is higher than the "normal game state" This is a state in which it is easy to be drawn out in a short time, and the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is long. Therefore, in the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", since it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the lower second start port 71a, the prize ball based on the prize to the lower second start port 71a (For example, 1 ball/winning prize) can be obtained and the game can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand.

This "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "900 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, in the low probability state of the special pattern "900 times "While the dynamic display is performed, if the loser continues to be extracted or won a small winning pattern (hereinafter, the case where the dynamic display of "900 times" is performed in the low probability state of the special pattern is referred to as the "ceiling It is configured to shift to the "ordinary map low probability time reduction state".

In addition, the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" is a predetermined specified number of times ("1140 times" in the first embodiment) of special symbols after the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is started. Until the dynamic display is executed, the variable display time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric part 72 is extended. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state".

It should be noted that, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortened state", when the special symbol is executed a specified number of times to move to "normal game state", in the "normal game state" again, "normal pattern low probability time shortened state" It is configured so that it cannot migrate to In addition, based on reaching the ceiling, a "normal low probability time reduction state" occurs, and in the "normal low probability time reduction state", the time reduction end condition based on the number of dynamic display executions of special symbols is established. In the case of shifting to "Normal game state", if the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols reaches the number of times of reaching the ceiling again, it may be configured to be able to shift to "Normal pattern low probability time reduction state" good.

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", as an added value after the end of the jackpot, it is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special pattern is increased, and the probability of winning of the normal pattern is increased, and the high-accuracy time-saving function is activated. state.

That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big winning result by special symbols is easily derived, a winning result by normal symbols is easily derived, and further, the open state of the normal electric combination 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to win the lower second start opening 71a, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the lower It is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the balls in hand by obtaining a prize ball (for example, 1 ball/winning prize) based on the prize winning to the side second start port 71a. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since it is configured (arranged) so that the ball fired by the right-handed game can win the upper second start port 71, the upper second start port 71 and The dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed by winning both of the lower second starting ports 71a. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is possible to play a game in a state in which a big winning game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability change state" is such that the special symbol jackpot probability is high until the special symbol jackpot result is derived in the "probability change state". And, when the jackpot result by the special pattern is derived, according to the jackpot type, it is configured to shift to the "general figure high probability time shortening state" or "latency probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the "latent probability change state", after the end of the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot of each special pattern is increased as an added value, and the probability of the jackpot is increased. 72 is open for a short period of time.

That is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big win result by special symbols is likely to be derived, while a win by normal symbols is difficult to be derived similarly to the "normal game state", and the normal electric player 72 is in an open state. is a short time.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the "latency probability fluctuation state" is configured (arranged) so that the ball fired by the right-handed game can enter the upper second start port 71, and the upper second start The dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed by the winning to the mouth 71 . Furthermore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to facilitate the winning of the small winning game (see FIG. 7(b)), and the winning of the small winning game opens the variable winning device 65 for a certain period of time. be. Then, in the "latent probability variable state", the closing period of the normal electric element 72 is long, and the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric element 72 from the right end to the left end, and the normal electric It is possible to flow down to the side of the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the winning combination 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a small win is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the variable winning device 65 is opened, so that the opened variable winning device 65 can win a ball to win a prize ball. . In the "latency probability variable state", the variable display time of the normal symbols is long (ie, "15 seconds"), and the opening time of the normal electrode 72 is also short (ie, "0.1 seconds"). Although there is, since the normal electric supply 72 can be opened to a certain extent, it is configured to be able to win the lower second starting port 71a.

In addition, in the "latency probability change state", the special symbol jackpot probability becomes a high probability state until the special symbol jackpot result is derived in the "latency probability change state". And, when the jackpot result by the special pattern is derived, according to the jackpot type, it is configured to shift to the "general figure high probability time shortening state" or "latency probability fluctuation state".

Here, each jackpot type will be described. The jackpot type "time reduction A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the fifth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, this jackpot type "time saving A" can be selected, and after the jackpot ends "normal pattern high probability time It is configured to shift to the "shortened state".

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, the jackpot type "variable probability A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and after the jackpot of the jackpot type "variable probability A" is completed, the "probability fluctuation state" is entered. configured to migrate with

Next, the jackpot type "probability A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. . In the first embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state", "normal high probability time shortening state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", a big hit with dynamic display of the first special symbol , or in all game states, when a jackpot is won by dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type of this jackpot type "probability A" can be selected, and the jackpot type " It is configured to shift to the "latency probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of "latency certainty A" is completed.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "probability variation A". Alternatively, 31 types of display patterns corresponding to "probability A", that is, a total of 64 types of display patterns, are provided. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, while it is possible to recognize the stop display of the losing It is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a stop display.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "latent". There are 31 types of display patterns corresponding to "OK A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. And each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type similarly to the upper LED group 37b1, and is previously associated with a random display pattern. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, while the player can recognize the stop display of losing, which of the jackpot types "short time A" or "probability A" is the stop display? are configured to be difficult to identify.

By configuring in this way, even when each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped, It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, it is difficult to identify which kind of jackpot only by the display result of the variable presentation, and a game property is created that makes the player guess which kind of jackpot it is, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp for suggesting a game state in which the ball is encouraged to be shot in a right-handed game. This right-handed notification lamp 37c is in a non-lighting state in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged and right-handed games are not encouraged, while in the "probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged. Latency probability fluctuating state”, “Normal pattern high probability time shortening state” or “Normal pattern low probability time shortening state”, or lighted state during jackpot game. The player can recognize whether or not a right-handed game should be played by checking the right-handed informing lamp 37c and the right-handed game suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a right-handed game suggestion in the third symbol display device 81, a main display right-handed instruction 89 (see FIG. 4) and an effect hitting instruction (See, for example, the right-hand hitting instruction 81d for effect in FIG. 57(d)).

The main display right-handed instruction 89 (see FIG. 4) is always displayed in synchronization with the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37. It is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the "latency probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", or during the jackpot game.

The effect hitting instruction is not synchronized with the right hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37, and only at a specific timing, a suggestive display of a left hitting game or a right hitting game is performed. When executing the right-handed suggestion display at the timing of switching from the right-handed game to the right-handed game, or when executing the left-handed suggestion display at the timing of switching from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, perform the left-handed game "Normal game state", when a left-handed game is played due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, or when a left-handed game is played in a game state in which a right-handed game is played. Secondly, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when, for example, a hitting to the right suggestion display is executed due to the winning of the ball into the first starting port 64 .

In addition, since the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction are important display information that suggests the player how to hit, other display contents executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the game are displayed. (For example, the third pattern of each pattern row displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, super ready-to-win effects, etc.) are prioritized and displayed in the foreground (foremost layer).

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation). Since it is configured, depending on the execution state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, for example, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the ceiling. When the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", while the variation production of the first special symbol is being executed in the third pattern display device 81, the production hitting instruction (right for production) is displayed in front of the fluctuation production There is a risk that a hint) will be displayed.

In such a case, while the left-handed game is being executed, during the execution of the variation performance of the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game, the right-handed performance suggestion is made. When displayed, part of the variable effect of the first special symbol is hidden by the right-handed suggestion for effect (see FIG. 57(d)), and there is a possibility that the player will be aroused. In addition, the player is puzzled by the appearance of the right-handed suggestion for performance, even though the third symbol display device 81 is executing the variation performance of the first special symbol during the left-handed game. there is a possibility.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in order to prevent mismatching of the display contents performed by the third symbol display device 81, the display timing of the effect hitting instruction is adjusted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming aroused by the game, and to consider whether the game state and the performance execution state should be a left-handed game or a right-handed game. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player whether or not the player should play the beating game, and it is configured so as to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the game due to confusion about the game. More details are provided below with reference to FIGS. 19, 56 and 57-59.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a ball entering the first starting port 64, a ball entering the upper second starting port 71, or a ball entering the lower second starting port 71a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting port 64, the upper The entry of the ball into the second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a may be referred to as "starting winning") as a trigger, the movement of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs a variable effect of the third symbol according to the game state while synchronizing with the target display, and the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter referred to as the second symbol display device 83, for convenience of explanation, may be referred to as a "normal symbol display device 83") composed of LEDs capable of executing variable display of normal symbols with passage as a trigger. is provided). A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later. , are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is controlled by the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special pattern display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special pattern display device 37 is performed using the third pattern of the third pattern display device 81. It is. In place of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels, LEDs, or the like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation). there is That is, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 64, when starting winning to the upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a, the first special It is configured so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed even while the dynamic display of the symbols is being executed. Also, during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, when starting winning to the first starting port 64, the second special It is configured so that the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed even during the execution of the dynamic display of the symbols.

Here, the execution mode of each special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 for each game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" where the left-handed game is encouraged, three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are used for the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed using the three symbols Z1 to Z3, and the special figure 2 variable area 88b (see FIG. 4) described later. 2 It is configured to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged ”, the variation production corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed using the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3, while the variation production corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the three symbol rows Z1. ~Z3 is not used, and it is configured to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 variable area 87b (see FIG. 4) described later.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is constructed so that a jackpot is generated after the variable performance is completed. For example, if you win the jackpot type "probable variation A" with a larger number of jackpot rounds than the jackpot type "time saving A", mainly numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" A variable effect is performed in which the main patterns with are aligned. In addition, when winning the jackpot type “time saving A”, there is mainly a variation effect in which even-numbered patterns, that is, main patterns with numbers “2”, “4”, “6” or “8” are aligned. will be

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that all the main symbols can appear when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won. Specifically, for example, even when the jackpot type “probability variable A” is won, there is a case where a variation performance is performed in which the same main symbols with the numbers “2” and “8” are aligned. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the variable performance is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and by performing the promotion performance during the big win, etc., the game variation is rich. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is the main display region Dm in which the third pattern is variably produced and reserved. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and when performing a variable effect corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3. →The third symbols are stop-displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the middle symbol row Z2. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning special symbol set (displayed) for each game state. be done.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

The cockpit display area Db is a variable display of the balls that have entered the first starting hole 64, the upper second starting hole 71, or the lower second starting hole 71a corresponding to the special symbols set for each game state. This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which (variable effect) has not been executed.

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, there are a dynamic display of the first special symbol and a fourth symbol display area 87 for the special symbol 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the number of held balls, and a dynamic display area of the second special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2, which can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of held balls, and the above-described main display right hitting instruction 89 are configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 includes a reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 1 variable area 87b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 is configured to be able to display the reservation number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the range of "0" to "4" in numerical designs. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 1 When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2, and if the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "3", the number of the first special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the number of pending display 87a for special figure 1 displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. is displayed.

The special figure 1 variable area 87b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is configured such that the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 1 variation area 87b is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It is configured to change at a high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, change again from white to red to . . . during execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square figure of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicates a big win. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the main display. In the "normal game state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display contents of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 includes a reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 2 variable area 88b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 is configured so that the number of reserved numbers for dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed in the range of "0" to "4". Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 2 When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and when the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "3", the second special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the special figure 2 pending number display 88a displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is the contents of the number of reserved balls of dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. And displayed to match, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm "general figure high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" and In the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", it is displayed so as to match the content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved design display area Db2, which will be described later.

Special figure 2 variation area 88b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, similar to special figure 1 variation area 87b, the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. It is Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 2 variation area 88b is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It is configured to change at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, repeat the change from white to red to . . . during dynamic display of the second special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special figure was lost, and the square figure of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to indicate that it was a big hit. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the main display. Synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm in the "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" and "normal low probability time reduction state" displayed in the area Dm is configured as

The right-handed hitting instruction 89 for main display is a display for suggesting to the player a game state in which shooting of a ball in a right-handed game is encouraged. This main display right-handed instruction 89 is not displayed in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged and the right-handed game is not encouraged, while in the "probability change state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged. , "latency probability fluctuation state", "general pattern high probability time shortening state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", or display state during the jackpot game. The player can recognize whether or not a right-handed game should be played by checking the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for main display and the right-handed hitting notification lamp 37c.

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 4B, for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. . In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, indicating that it is easier than usual to transition to a big win, and a shooting mode that is encouraged according to the game state. etc. are suggested to the player. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol When the ball enters the first starting port 64, or the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (dynamic display). When a ball enters the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a while the ball is being held, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of retained balls) is retained up to 4 times at maximum. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 or the number for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 It is also displayed in the reserved number display 88a, and further, the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the game state is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved symbol display area Db1 of the cockpit display area Db. be

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (number of reserved balls 1 time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed according to the game state. Designs ("○" design (white circle design) in the normal display mode) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of displayed reserved designs displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state The number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (prioritized display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1a, the first special design that is set to be displayed according to the gaming state Or it shows that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed one each in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the game state Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed and set according to is two times, and three in total, one each in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c When the reserved pattern is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved patterns are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed one each in the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. indicates that In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design or the second special design set to be displayed according to the game state is 0. This indicates that there is no pending variable effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time, but only one of the lottery games can be configured to run When only one of the lottery games is executed, when one of the lottery games being executed is finished, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively. , the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed preferentially over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation), or the first special symbol The first lottery game may be configured to be executed with priority over the second lottery game of the second special symbol (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation), or in the order of winning (so-called winning order fluctuation) A special symbol lottery game may be executed accordingly. Further, the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol may be configured to be displayed simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reservation symbol display area Db1a, and execution symbols larger than the reservation symbols displayed in the reservation symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d are provided. configured to be displayed. Further, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols.

The executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased when the variable effect being executed in the main display area Dm is completed, and the displayed suspended symbols are shifted to the lower reserved symbols as the executed symbols are erased. It moves and is displayed as a pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", it was displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. When the executed symbols are erased, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1a. Further, the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db1b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, or the lower second starting port 71a is up to 4 times. Although configured to be held, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description is continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 performs a normal symbol winning lottery due to the turn-on. This through gate 67 is only used as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is constructed so that prize balls or the like are not paid out even when a ball passes through. In addition, a normal prize winning opening capable of acquiring a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be provided, and a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained, and a predetermined prize ball may be paid out.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, an ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged. The normal electric element 72 is mainly composed of a retractable plate 72a and a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the retractable plate 72a.

The main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) of the first embodiment normally maintains the protruding/retracting plate 72a of the ordinary electric part 72 in a projecting state to cover the upper side of the lower second starting port 71a in front view. , to prevent the ball from flowing into the lower second starting port 71a. Then, when winning is won by the variable display of the normal symbols, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the hive plate 72a of the normal electric 72 protrudes for the predetermined time. The game board 13 is driven from the state to the immersed state in which the player is immersed in the game board 13 so that the ball can flow into the lower second starting port 71a, and the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is displayed on the right side in the front view. It is configured to be in a state in which the falling balls are likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a, that is, in a prize assisting state.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a win in the variable display of normal symbols changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to a low probability state (eg, 70/100), and the normal pattern In the variable display, by making it more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal figure high probability time reduction state", it is difficult to put the haunt board 72a of the ordinary electric worker 72 into the immersion state (open state), and the "probability It is configured so that it is difficult to win the lower second start port 71a from the "fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", the winning probability of normal patterns is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and in the variable display of normal patterns, "normal game state", " By making it easier to win a hit than "normal figure low probability time shortening state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the haunting plate 72a of the ordinary electric officer 72 is made easier to enter (open state), and the lower second start port 71a is configured so that it can easily win a prize.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high-probability state of the normal symbols, the variable display derives the hit with a high probability (that is, 99%), so the "probability fluctuation state" in which the normal symbols are in a high-probability state; In the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", many of the balls fired in the right-handed game are configured to win the lower second start port 71a. On the other hand, among the low probability state of the normal symbol, in the “normal game state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”, although the variable display can derive the hit with a lower probability than the high probability state (that is, 70%), the normal phone Since the opening time of the combination 72 is short, it is difficult for the ball shot in the right-handed game to enter the lower second starting port 71a from the high probability state. In addition, among the low-probability state of the normal pattern, in the "normal low-probability time reduction state", the variable display is in a state that can derive the hit with a lower probability than the high-probability state (that is, 70%), but the normal phone Since the opening time of the role 72 is as long as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the ball fired in the right-handed game is "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation It is configured so as to be able to win the lower second starting port 71a from "state".

As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (or "latency probability fluctuation state"), the ball fired in the right-handed game is lowered By making it possible to play the game while winning to the second starting port 71a, the player can play his own game from the "normal game state" by paying out the prize balls based on the winning to the lower second starting port 71a. A game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls in hand.

In addition, as in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol from the "normal game state", according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal electric It is also possible to change the time for which the haunting board 72a of the role 72 is immersed (opened) or the number of times the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is immersed (opened) per time. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state", the time for the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 to be immersed is made longer than the "normal game state", or one hit In , the number of times that the haunting board 72a of the normal electric combination 72 is immersed may be made larger than the "normal game state" and the "latency probability change state". In addition, in the “probability fluctuation state” or “normal pattern high probability time shortening state”, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased, the immersion time of the haunt board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is increased, and the normal electric role 72 At least two of increasing the number of retractions of the protruding/retracting plate 72a may be performed at the same time.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric power provided above the lower second start port 71a in front view The winning combination 72 is activated for a predetermined period of time, and when it stops with a symbol other than a predetermined symbol ("X" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric winning combination 72 is deactivated (the closed state is maintained). is configured as follows.

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-described second symbol reservation lamp 84 (hereinafter referred to as the second symbol reservation lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "normal symbol reservation lamp 84" ) is also illuminated. Four normal design reserve lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal design display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special design display device 37 or the third design display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting hole 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. A game nail or the like is planted around the first starting port 64 so that about 6 balls (so-called S1=6) fired in a left-handed game win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the first special symbol according to the game state. A variation effect based on is executed. The first starting hole 64 is also one of the prize winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, there is provided a lower second starting port 71a through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in the open state. To this lower second start port 71a, the game state that the normal electric role 72 is easy to open (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state") , game nails are planted in the periphery so that about 50 to 60 balls fired in a right-handed game win prizes per minute. When the ball enters the lower second start port 71a, the lower second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the lower second start port switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) draws a jackpot for the second special symbol. Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation based on the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. A performance is performed. The lower second starting hole 71a also serves as one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

On the downstream side of the through gate 67 and on the upstream side of the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric motor 72, an upper second starting port 71 through which a ball can enter is provided. A game nail or the like is planted around the upper second starting port 71 so that about 30 to 40 balls fired in a right-handed game win prizes per minute. In the vicinity of the upper second starting port 71 (directly above when viewed from the front), there is no ordinary electric machine 72, etc., and the ball fired in a right-handed game is the upper first starting port in any game state. 2 starting port 71 is configured to be able to win a prize to a certain extent. When the ball enters the upper second start port 71, the upper second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the upper second start port switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5). Then, the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the second special symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. A variation effect based on is executed. The upper second starting hole 71 is also one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters the game.

A horizontally long rectangular big prize winning opening is provided in the substantially central portion of the variable prize winning device 65 on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, three identical symbols ("777 etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, according to the type of jackpot, a jackpot opening/closing plate 65a provided in the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and the game state is shifted to a special game state (jackpot game) in which the ball easily enters the jackpot. In this special game state, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened until a predetermined condition is established (for example, until "30 seconds" elapse or until 10 balls are won). . It should be noted that, when a lottery result that becomes a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened due to the passage of the through gate 67, and a big winning game (for example, a predetermined game state) may be configured to transition to the game state. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state" (e.g., normal game state, first firing mode), the dynamic display of the first special symbol that can suggest whether or not to transition to the jackpot game (e.g., the game result suggestion effect part) wins a jackpot and a jackpot pattern appears (for example, the generation condition is satisfied), after the dynamic display of the special pattern that becomes the jackpot is completed, a right-handed game is executed and a through gate is performed. A ball launch effect that urges the player to enter the ball into the 67 (for example, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Hit right and enter the ball into the gate to start the big win!", or the upper right of the screen). ) is performed (for example, related effect executing means), and a predetermined big hit waiting screen (for example, one of the game result suggesting effects) is performed until the ball passes through the through gate 67. part) and does not start the jackpot performance (eg, specific performance) related to the jackpot game (eg, performance non-starting means). Then, a ball is shot in accordance with the ball shooting effect, enters the through gate 67, and is detected by a through switch (not shown; detecting means), thereby starting a jackpot state. As the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened, the big winning waiting screen is switched to the big winning game performance, and the big winning performance is started (for example, specific performance executing means). The display area for the ball shooting effect is smaller than the display area for the big win effect. Further, even when the big win effect is started, the ball shooting effect may be continuously displayed together with the big win effect.

When the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses after opening or when a predetermined number of winnings is detected, and after the closure, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened again. be. The opening/closing operation of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It is visible through window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65, 71 and 71a are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. The winning balls of the winning holes 63, 64, 65, 71 and 71a are guided to the ball discharging path and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the balls passing through the out hole 66.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 sets the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of each special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 and the variable effect, and the display result of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 83. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reservation number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a jackpot open table 202f, a small hit open table 202g, a random number table per normal figure 202h, and a normal figure. At least a fluctuation table 202i, an ordinary electric service open table 202j, and a time saving end condition table 202k are stored. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., perform lottery for big hits, setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in MPU 201 of main controller 110 . In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, various control timings, game state transitions, etc. will also be described with reference to FIGS.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot pattern. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance mode, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. A variation type counter CS1 used for .

In addition, for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, the normal pattern per counter C4 is used, and for the initial value setting of the normal pattern per counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used.

Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "4 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). , and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 as appropriate. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas includes a first start port 64, an upper second start port 71 or a lower side Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 71a.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 9999"), and reaches the maximum value (eg, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter of a range of "0 to 9999". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64 (start win), the first reserve first to It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reservation areas in the fourth area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (starting winning), it corresponds to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (second special symbol) It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation area in any one of the second reservation first to fourth areas provided in the second reservation ball storage area 203e.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1") corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. , FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2") corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. be.

The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment are respectively for each setting value, the low probability state used when the game state is a special symbol low probability state, and the game The state is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the high probability state of the special design which has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the low probability state of the special design.

For each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. That is, when increasing the number of big-hit random numbers in order to shift from a low-probability state to a high-probability state, the number of losing random numbers is reduced, and the decrement is assigned as the number of big-hit random numbers. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small hit random numbers is set to be the same for each set value. That is, the number of small winning random numbers in the first special symbol is configured to be the same number for each set value. Similarly, the number of small winning random numbers in the second special symbol is also configured to be the same number for each set value. In this way, by setting the number of small winning random numbers to be the same for each set value in each special symbol, the rate of giving the game value considering only the small winning game at all the set values in each special symbol can be increased. be equivalent.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers for each setting of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers for all set values. configured to Also, the number of small hit random numbers of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured not to change for each setting. That is, the increased amount of the number of the jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is compensated by decreasing the number of the missing random numbers and allocating the reduced amount to the jackpot random numbers, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern. The number of small hit random numbers is the same for each first special symbol or second special symbol setting. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, thereby reducing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values associated with the setting change is calculated from the jackpot random number counter C1 by the jackpot random number value that can be acquired when the player is most likely to stay in the game. Compensation is performed from the combination of the most random numbers (that is, a losing random number) other than . By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to make setting determination difficult from the number of appearances of the losing combination, which is the most frequently occurring combination in the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be made difficult to be detected by setting only the appearance rate of the big win having a lower appearance probability than the losing combination as the determining element set by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, setting value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player see through the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers associated with the setting change is compensated for by increasing the number of the jackpot random number counter C1, which corresponds to a losing combination that gives no game value to the player. Compensate from the number.

A losing combination is a combination that does not give a game value, unlike a big winning combination or a small winning combination. It is a role that is not clearly (extremely) displayed. Here, if both the number of large winning random numbers corresponding to the big winning game and the number of small winning random numbers corresponding to the small winning game, which are likely to be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rate of the two elements of the big winning game and the small winning game with the data lamp, it becomes easy to guess the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, for example, when the player sees through the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, set value "1"), the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and pachinko. There is a possibility that the operation of the machine 10 will be lowered.

Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values associated with the setting change of the probability setting value is not given to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1, and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. is compensated from the number of the random number corresponding to the loss, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is hardly seen through from the occurrence rate of the small wins, with only the occurrence rate of the big wins as the determination element set by the player. be able to. Therefore, the discriminating element of the probability setting value is limited to the appearance rate of a combination based on one random number, and for example, even if the setting is low (i.e., setting value "1", etc.), it is set to the player. The game can be continued without being detected, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the jackpot random number that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 The number of values of the counter C1 (random number value for jackpot) is 32, and the value "0 to 31" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 random number table 202a1 for jackpot. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is, It is set so that 32/10000=0.32/100 (that is, 0.32%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 221, and the value "0 to 220" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value “1” (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 221/10000=2.21/100 (that is, 2 .21%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that are small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 are both 5000, The value "32 to 5031" in the case of the low probability state, or the value "221 to 5220" in the case of the high probability state is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 5000/10000=50.00/100 (that is, 50.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 4968 pieces, the value "5032 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 4779 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "5221 to 9999" It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 4968/10000=49.68/100 (that is, 49.68%), and the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 4779/10000=47.79/100 (that is, 47.79%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the first special symbol is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. , while compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 4968 or less). is configured to be

Thus, in the first special symbol, the random number value (small winning random number value) to be a small winning number is set to a number that is likely to be selected in the same manner as the losing random number value. That is, in the lottery game in the first special symbol, it is set to be easy to win the losing and the small hit.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 34, and the value "0 to 33 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is It is set so that 34/10000=0.34/100 (that is, 0.34%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 223, and the value "0 to 222" is , is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value “2” (that is, “probability fluctuation state” or “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 223/10000=2.23/100 (that is, 2 .23%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about seven times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" As in the case of , both are 5000, the value "34 to 5033" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "223 to 5222" in the case of a high probability state are specified in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 (set ). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 5000/10000=50.00/100 (that is, 50.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 4966 pieces, the value "5034 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 4777 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "5223 to 9999" is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 4966/10000=49.66/100 (that is, 49.66%), and the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 4777/10000=47.77/100 (that is, 47.77%).

That is, at the setting value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the first special symbol is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. , while compensating for the decrement, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are the number of big hit random numbers that are larger than the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state". It is configured to be within the range (that is, 4966 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 50.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.32%→0.34%, High probability state: 2.21%→2.23%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 36, and the value "0 to 35 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is It is set so that 36/10000=0.36/100 (that is, 0.36%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random number) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 225, and the value "0 to 224" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "3" (that is, "latency probability change state" or "probability change state") is 225/10000 = 2.25/100 (that is, 2 .25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" And as in the case of "2", both are 5000, the value "36 to 5035" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "225 to 5224" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 5000/10000=50.00/100 (that is, 50.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 4964 pieces, the value "5036 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 4775 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "5225 to 9999" It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 4964/10000=49.64/100 (that is, 49.64%), and the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 4775/10000=47.75/100 (that is, 47.75%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the first special symbol is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. , while compensating for the decrement, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are the number of big hit random numbers that are larger than the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state". It is configured to be within the range (that is, 4964 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 50.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 0.34%→0.36%, high-probability state: 2.23%→2.25%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", it is a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number) is 32, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 31" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 32/10000=0.32/100 (that is, 0.32%), like the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 221, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 220" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol with the set value "1" (that is, "latency probability change state" or "probability change state") is 221, like the first special symbol. /10000=2.21/100 (that is, 2.21%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that are small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 are both 7500, The value "32 to 7531" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "221 to 7720" in the case of a high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 7500/10000=75.00/100 (that is, 75.00%) in any game state, and the low probability of the special symbol It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 2468 pieces, the value "7532 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 2279 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "7721 to 9999" 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 2468/10000=24.68/100 (that is, 24.68%), and the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 2279/10000=22.79/100 (that is, 22.79%).

That is, at the setting value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of special figure 2 is reduced by the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state'' (that is, 2468 or less). is configured as

Thus, in the same manner as in the first special design, a random number value (small winning random number) is set in the second special design as well, and compared to the losing random number in the second special design, it is very large. The number is set so that it is easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, it is set to make it easier to win a small win than a big win or a loss.

In addition, although the details will be described later, when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the role at the time of each small hit is different. is configured to

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 opened by winning the small win game is set to be short. (see FIG. 23). Further, the lottery result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is likely to be derived in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol is small. Even if the ball is switched to the right-handed game at the timing of winning the winning game, it is difficult to win the variable prize-winning device 65 because the opening time of the variable prize-winning device 65 is short, and the ball is shot by performing the right-handed game. As a result, there is a high possibility that the player will end up with a loss. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right-handed informing lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is turned off, and is used for the main display. The right hitting instruction 89 is also in a non-display state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed at the time when the small winning is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed. It is configured so as to stop the dynamic display at a lost pattern (see FIG. 38). Furthermore, in the "normal game state", the time until the dynamic display result of the second special symbol is derived is longer than the time until the dynamic display result of the first special symbol is derived. Since it is configured to be easily obtained or won (see FIGS. 11 to 16 described later), the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is a small winning in the dynamic display of the first special symbol It is easy to be stopped by

That is, the small winning in the dynamic display of the first special symbol does not play the role of winning prize balls, but the role of stopping the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in the "normal game state". have a function. By configuring in this way, a right-handed game is performed in the "normal game state" to win the upper second start port 71, and by the winning, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is won as a small win. Unexpected prize balls in terms of game specifications can be suppressed, in which prize balls are won by winning in the variable prize winning device 65 opened by winning.

On the other hand, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the opening time of the variable winning device 65, which is opened by winning the small win game, is configured to be long (Fig. 23). reference). In addition, the lottery result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to be derived, "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" to perform the right-handed game and "latency probability fluctuation state", and among these, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins a small hit in the "latency probability fluctuation state", it is possible to easily win a prize to the variable prize winning device 65 (See FIGS. 20 and 21, which will be described later).

That is, the small winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol serves as a role for winning prize balls in the "latent probability fluctuation state".

A specific area may be provided in the variable winning device 65, and a jackpot may be generated by opening the variable winning device 65 and allowing game balls to pass through the specific region. Further, a non-specific area (for example, a loss hole) different from the specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65, and when the variable winning device 65 is opened and the game ball passes through the non-specific region, no big win occurs. It may be configured to end the small winning game. By configuring in this way, the variable winning device 65 is opened when winning the small winning game, the game ball is made to enter the variable winning device 65, and the winning game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big win. Or, the winning game ball passes through the non-specific area and ends without becoming a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, from the start of the small winning game, the game ball passes through a specific area and becomes a big win, passes through a non-specific area and ends the small winning game without becoming a big win, or the small winning game ends. In the third symbol display device 81, until the small winning game ends without winning the game ball in the variable winning device 65 opened at the start, or until the result of either is derived. It may be configured to direct whether or not a jackpot will be achieved. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins a small win (eg, transition condition) (eg, transition condition determination means), and is matched with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 A notification performance is performed so as to shift from a left-handed game to a right-handed game. After that, at the same time as the start of the small winning game, the third symbol display device 81 starts a challenge effect (for example, first effect) to determine whether or not it will be a big win, and the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, a predetermined area) ( For example, entering ball detection means) to become a big hit, passing through a non-specific area and ending a small winning game without becoming a big win, or a variable winning device opened with the start of a small winning game The challenge performance is ended (for example, performance end means), and the challenge is triggered by the fact that either the small winning game is ended without winning the game ball within 65 or the result is derived. It may be configured to start execution of a V winning effect (for example, a second effect) that suggests to the player that the game state can be changed by winning a V prize, unlike the effect. In addition, the execution time of the challenge effect is set in advance (for example, period setting means), and if the ball does not pass through the V prize or the non-specific area even after the execution period elapses, an error such as ball clogging will occur. has occurred, it may be configured to execute error processing (for example, error notification effect) as a winning error.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 34, and the value "0 to 33" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 34/10000=0.34/100 (that is, 0.34%), like the first special symbol.

In addition, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 223, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 222" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol with the set value "2" (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 223, like the first special symbol. /10000=2.23/100 (that is, 2.23%), and the high-probability state of the special symbols is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" As in the case of , both are 7500, the value "34 to 7533" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "223 to 7722" in the case of a high probability state are specified in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 (set ). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 7500/10000=75.00/100 (that is, 75.00%) in any gaming state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 2466 pieces, the value "7534 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 2277 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "7723 to 9999" 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 2466/10000=24.66/100 (that is, 24.66%), and the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 2277/10000=22.77/100 (that is, 22.77%).

That is, at the set value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of special figure 2 is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the number of jackpot random numbers for the increase due to the change of the set value are within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state". (that is, 2466 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 75.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.32%→0.34%, High probability state: 2.21%→2.23%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 36, and the value "0 to 35" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 36/10000=0.36/100 (that is, 0.36%), like the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 225, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 224" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol with the set value "3" (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 225, like the first special symbol. /10000=2.25/100 (that is, 2.25%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" And as in the case of "2", both are 7500, the value "36 to 7535" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "225 to 7724" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 7500/10000=75.00/100 (that is, 75.00%) in any gaming state, and the low probability of the special symbol It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 2464 pieces, the value "7536 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 2275 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "7725 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 2464/10000=24.64/100 (that is, 24.64%), and the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 2275/10000=22.75/100 (that is, 22.75%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of special figure 2 is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the number of jackpot random numbers for the increase due to the change of the set value are within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state". (that is, 2464 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 75.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.34%→0.36%, High probability state: 2.23%→2.25%).

As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" is ”, “Normal figure high probability time shortening state” or “Normal figure low probability time shortening state” while compensating from the number of losing random numbers, “Normal game state”, “Normal figure high probability time shortening state” Alternatively, it is configured to be within the range of the number of random numbers that are lost in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the number of small hit random numbers is changed to "normal game state", "normal figure high probability time reduction state" or "normal figure low probability time reduction "state" and "probability change state" or "latent probability change state" are not changed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increment of the jackpot random number value, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of man-hours when designing the game specifications. be able to.

It should be noted that the jackpot random number table 202a may be provided with a random number that wins the time-saving symbol that will shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" without going through the jackpot state. In this case, the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling and the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" by winning the time saving pattern can occur at the same time. However, in such a case, the configuration is such that priority is given to the state that is more advantageous for the player. For example, if the number of time reductions of "500 times" can be given due to the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" due to the winning of the time reduction pattern, the ceiling is reached and the transition to "normal low probability time reduction state" Since the number of times of time reduction ("1140 times") that can be given in the case of doing so increases, it is configured to prioritize the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling.

Also, from the start of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big win, passes through a non-specific area and ends the small winning game without becoming a big win, or starts the small winning game. until the small winning game ends without winning the game ball in the variable winning device 65 opened along with , or until the result of either is derived, the third symbol display device 81 displays the big winning It may be configured to produce whether or not. In this case, for example, in the “normal game state”, the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins a small hit (for example, the first game situation), and the left-handed game to the right in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 A notification performance is performed so as to shift to a hitting game. After that, at the same time as the start of the small winning game, whether or not the third symbol display device 81 will be a big win is displayed, and a shooting suggestion effect (for example, "Aim for V!" A part of 1 production.) starts the production during V opening (for example, the first production), and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, or passes through the non-specific area and does not become a big hit. Either the small winning game ends at the beginning of the small winning game, or the small winning game ends without winning the game ball in the variable winning device 65 opened with the start of the small winning game Using the derivation as an opportunity (for example, a second game situation), the effect during V opening is switched (for example, a switching means), and unlike the effect during V opening, a V prize can be won and the game state can be shifted. It may be configured to start execution of a V acquisition effect (for example, a second effect) suggesting that to the player. In the case of winning V during the small winning game, after the small winning game ends, the game state is shifted to the big winning game, and a game value more advantageous to the player than the small winning game is given in the big winning game. can be configured to Furthermore, it may be constructed such that when a big win is won, the ball can always enter the specific area.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot is selected from the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a, the second reserve of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a Of the second holding first to fourth areas of the ball storage area 203e, it is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area where the big hit random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, That is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss or a small hit (losing random value or a small hit random value), the variation pattern in the fluctuation production and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are lost or small hit be of the hour. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) that will result in a jackpot, a variable effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b includes a special-figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special-figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. and are provided.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 8(b) is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b is divided into the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a table in which the value of C2 is associated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, although the jackpot probability of the special symbols is in a low probability state, the special symbols are played a specified number of times (100 in the first embodiment). times), until the hit probability of normal patterns is high, the jackpot type "short time A" corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 10 rounds, the next jackpot Until then, the jackpot type "probability change A" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" in which both the special pattern jackpot probability and the normal pattern hit probability are in a high probability state, and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the normal pattern There is a jackpot type ``potential probability A'' corresponding to a ``latent probability fluctuation state'' in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is in a high probability state until the next jackpot, although the hit probability is in a low probability state.

The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot are different. A value that can be taken by the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the is associated.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8(a), when the first special symbol jackpot occurs in the "normal game state", the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type "time reduction A" Values "0 to 34" are associated, and values "35 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with the jackpot type "probability variable A". Also, if the first special pattern jackpot occurs in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type " The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 34" is associated with the time saving A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "probability A".

Therefore, in the lottery for the first special symbol in the "normal game state", the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d is When the value is a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "time saving A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "variable A ” can be selected.

In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the first reserved ball storage area If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reservation areas of 203d is a jackpot value, in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area The jackpot type associated with the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2 can be selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "short time A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "probability A" can be selected.

Therefore, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the ``normal game state'', the jackpot type ``short time A'' is 35% and the jackpot type ``variable probability A'' is 65%. becomes. Also, if you win a jackpot with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", The jackpot type "short time A" will be elected at a rate of 35%, and the jackpot type "probability A" will be 65% instead of the jackpot type "variable probability A".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first start port 64 can be won and the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed, while the upper second start port 71 or the lower side Since it is difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol because it is difficult to win the second start port 71a, in the game state of the left-handed game (that is, "normal game state"), the first special symbol is configured so that the dynamic display of

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 8(b), when the second special pattern jackpot occurs in all game states, the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type "time reduction A" is associated with the value of "0 to 34", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "probability A".

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all game states, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second reserved ball storage areas 203e is a big hit. , the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area can be selected from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "time saving A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "potential A" ” can be selected.

Therefore, when a big win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the big win type ``short time A'' is 35% and the jackpot type ``probability A'' is 65%.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the right-handed game is not encouraged (not recommended or prohibited) in the "normal game state", and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state". The time until the result is derived is longer than the time until the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived (see FIGS. 11 to 16 described later), and further , the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is configured to be stopped as a losing symbol by winning the small hit of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol is displayed in the "normal game state". A lottery result by dynamic display of symbols is substantially difficult to derive.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. FIG. 9 shows, in each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of 2 special symbols and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. Also, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the launch mode in each game state and the transition destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. Although FIG. 10 also shows the transition of the game state when the game is played in the non-recommended shooting mode, the description thereof will be omitted here for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 9, the transition to the "normal game state" is triggered by dynamic display of special symbols in the factory default state, the RAM clear state, and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" 100 times. If (so-called end of power supply. See FIG. 10), or if the dynamic display of special symbols in the "general figure low probability time reduction state" is executed 1140 times (so-called end of power supply. See FIG. 10 ), and

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the "normal game state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a low probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, and the ball shot in the left-handed game mainly wins the first starting port 64. - 特許庁Then, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds", and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is "20 seconds to 190 seconds". (See FIGS. 11 to 16, which will be described later). In addition, in this "normal game state", when a right-handed game is performed, the firing mode is detected by the through gate 67 or the like, and based on the detection, a voice is generated in order to suppress the shooting in the right-handed game. The output device 226 (see FIG. 5) or the like is configured to execute the prohibition of hitting to the right.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "900 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, the low probability of the special pattern While the dynamic display of "900 times" is performed in the state, it is the case that the winning continues to be extracted or the small win is won (see FIG. 10).

In addition, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is low probability, and the normal symbol hit probability is also low probability, but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long (see FIG. 24). Furthermore, in the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the upper second start port 71, and the low probability time reduction function is activated. You can enter the lower second starting port 71a. Then, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is also "2 seconds to 190 seconds". (See FIGS. 11 to 16, which will be described later). In addition, in this "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Then, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is the winning of the jackpot type "time reduction A" (see FIG. 10).

In this "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", as described above, while the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", as in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the upper second start port 71 , It can win the lower side 2nd starting mouth 71a in which the high-precision time saving function is operating. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "2 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 11 to 16, which will be described later). It should be noted that, in this "normal figure high probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" is the winning of the jackpot type "probability variation A" (see FIG. 10).

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", as described above, the probability of the jackpot of special symbols is high, and the probability of winning of normal symbols is also high. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the upper second start port 71, and the lower side where the high-accuracy time-saving function is operating You can win the second starting port 71a. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is "2 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 11 to 16, which will be described later). In this "variable probability state", right-handed games are encouraged, so even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "latency probability fluctuation state" is the winning of the jackpot type "latency probability A" (see FIG. 10).

In addition, in the "latency probability change state", as described above, while the jackpot probability of special symbols is in a high probability state, the probability of winning in normal symbols is in a low probability state. Furthermore, in the "latency probability variable state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and although the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the upper second start port 71, the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" and Since the time saving function is not operating like "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", it is difficult to win a prize to the lower second start port 71a. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is "2 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 11 to 16, which will be described later). In this "latency probability variable state", since right-handed games are encouraged, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of pending variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected for each effect mode, and a variation time shorter than the long pattern. and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") in which a shorter fluctuation time than the middle pattern is likely to be selected. It is

Specifically, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" as "reach display" "Normal reach" effect mode in which only the variable element is executed, "Super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach", and the same "normal reach" change Any one of six presentation modes can be selected, including a "special reach" presentation mode in which a variable element of "special reach" is executed by developing from the element.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode and "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode, The “reach (middle)” production mode and the “non-reach (short)” production mode may be collectively referred to as “the “non-reach” production mode”. In the third symbol display device 81 in which ~Z3 fluctuates, after the "high-speed variation" variable element of shuffling the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at high speed is performed, in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop and "ready-to-win display" does not occur.

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" is, for example, in the variable performance of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is , a variable element that is rapidly scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, specific production modes ("non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode) are excluded. It is configured so that the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed at the

The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element means that, in the third pattern fluctuation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, the third pattern is displayed at a speed that is visible to the player. A moving element that scrolls to In this "low-speed variation" variable element, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in two symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4)) that are stopped and displayed first, it is assumed that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and the "normal reach" is displayed. While developing into a variable element, when a different third pattern stops in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 which are stopped and displayed first, the remaining pattern row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is finished. is configured to The details of each variable element including the variable element of "high-speed variation" or the variable element of "low-speed variation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "low speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high speed variation" variation element is performed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop in order, A different third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped first, the remaining one pattern row Z2 is stopped, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "low-speed variation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed variation" is performed, and the "high-speed variation" variation is performed. After the completion of the elements, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the same time, and the third symbol different from the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the two symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode). is stopped, the other symbol row Z2 is also stopped, and the variation effect of 1 is completed.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode means that the same third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed first in the variation production of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81. Immediately after that, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and other "reach display", that is, one of the production modes of "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" be.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (number of pending balls) The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Also, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number table 202c on hold provided in the ROM202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variable effect, is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable presentation is determined based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the variation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency" Depending on whether it is "probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal game state", and (3) how many pending ball numbers of the variable production are held, the production mode This is for changing the selection ratio of .

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode, are determined depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or the jackpot lottery is lost. The degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode by configuring the mode selection ratio to be different. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the "super reach" performance mode or "special reach" performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode that makes it easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the obtained result of the lottery is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. Based on, it is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired result of the lottery is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed in the variable performance, and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. When the variable performance is on, the big win is hardly generated by the variable performance, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as the second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on balls entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the state of reaching .

Specifically, the number of standby times for the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and since the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability In the game state where the ball is likely to enter the lower second start port 71a in the "fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the maximum reserved ball of the second special symbol easy to reach numbers. In these game states, if you select a variable performance with a long variable time, the ball entering the lower second start port 71a in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the lower side The lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired even though the ball is entered into the second starting port 71a. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first start port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the balls. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol) is easily reached, and the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is reached It is possible to suppress the entrance to the ball.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start within the fluctuation time of the variable effect being executed If the ball is not entered into any of the openings 71a, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Without it, I lose interest in the game. In addition, since the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, it is difficult for the player to enter the ball into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will be recognized as a pachinko machine 10 and that the machine will be judged to be a machine with which it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Further, as a fourth reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously executing dynamic display of the first special symbol and dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel. However, the special symbols to be executed (recommended) for each game state are preset (regulated) as game specifications, and in order to actively draw the special symbols to be executed for each game state, it is assumed that , It is configured to give a predetermined penalty (penalty) when a special symbol lottery opportunity that is not desired to be executed in a predetermined game state (unencouragement) is acquired.

Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state", a left-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed to win the jackpot game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. While obtaining the game value of the big win game, the game property of whether the big win type ``short time A'' or ``variable probability A'' is realized according to the type of the big win. In addition, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and the time saving function is effective. To realize a game property as to whether or not a jackpot game is won in the dynamic display of special symbols during the period. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the next big-hit game will be what kind of big-hit type while the right-handed game is performed and the winning assistance state is maintained. Realize the playability of whether or not. In addition, in the "latent probability variable state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and the small winning game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. To realize a game property as to whether or not the next big win game will be the kind of big win while obtaining a game value by a game.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the left-handed game is encouraged, Execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the right-handed game is encouraged in the "probable time reduction state" and "latency probability fluctuation state". Here, if the game is not executed according to the game specifications described above, in particular, the act of executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol while executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is performed, a game result different from the payout rate based on the game specification set at the beginning is derived, and there is a risk of causing an unexpected disadvantage in the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", when a plurality of dynamic displays of the second special symbol are suspended (for example, four), the newly started second special The dynamic display of the symbols is performed for a longer time (for example, "20 seconds") than the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed during the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The dynamic display of the second special symbol can be stopped as a lost symbol by winning a small hit in the display. By configuring in this way, when the ball is made to enter the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a that causes the dynamic display of special symbols that are not encouraged as a game specification, the second By lowering the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the special symbols, the efficiency of giving the game value can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to make the player hesitate to execute the dynamic display of the special symbols for which the dynamic display is not encouraged, thereby suppressing the execution of a game different from the assumed game specifications, thereby preventing the player from entering the hall. disadvantage can be reduced.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", left-handed games are not encouraged as game specifications, Even if the non-encouraged game (ie, left-handed game) is played, the game value obtained by the player is set lower than when the recommended game (ie, right-handed game) is played. . For this reason, since it is not a game mode that is disadvantageous to the game hall, no particular penalties are provided.

Here, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 corresponding to the first special design, and FIG. 12 schematically shows the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2 corresponding to the second special design. It is a schematic diagram.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, whether the variation effect is appropriate and Based on the game state at the time and the total number of reservations of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol at that time as well, refer to the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 It is configured. In addition, when performing the variation performance of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, whether the variation performance is appropriate and the game state at that time And, referring to the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2 based on the total number of reservations of the second special symbol fluctuation effect at that time, it is configured to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6. . Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 in FIG. 3", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 13A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when extracting a loss or a small hit in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "4", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 13(b) ) is selected. On the other hand, when extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Then, at the time of losing or small hit extraction of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", any number of retained balls Also, the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 14(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when extracting the jackpot of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", stop The C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the pattern table 202d is selected.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 in FIG. 12, when extracting a loss or a small hit in the "normal game state", the E table of the stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of reserved balls 202d5 (see FIG. 14(b)) is selected. Also, when extracting a jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Then, at the time of losing or small hit extraction of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal high probability time shortening state", the number of held balls of the second special symbol is "1 piece , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 13A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. In addition, when extracting a loss or a small hit in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state" or "normal high probability time reduction state", the number of balls held in the second special symbol is "2 4", the F table 202d6 (see FIG. 14(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Next, when the "latent probability fluctuation state" is lost or extracted, the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 14(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Also, when extracting a jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

In addition, when extracting a jackpot in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" When the first special symbol is lost or a small hit is extracted, or when the second special symbol is lost or a small hit is extracted in the "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the stop pattern according to the number of retained balls Table 202d may be configured differently. For example, when a big win is won and the number of reserved balls is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

In this case, for example, in each rendering mode in which "ready-to-reach display" is executed, a rendering mode in which only the time of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. . By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4 times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds ends (when the variable element of the "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the effect mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, at the time of the 100th round loss or small hit extraction of "normal figure high probability time shortening state", that is, the consecutive game state ends and shifts to "normal game state" The stop pattern table 202d for the dynamic display (specific state) of the different special symbols is set individually so that the variation time is a fixed time (for example, "20 seconds") regardless of the number of held balls. may be configured. By configuring in this way, while executing the continuous game end effect (for example, the first effect) that informs the player that the continuous game state is over, It is possible to inform the player of the number of big hits (so-called number of consecutive games) and the number of winning balls, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, when extracting the 1st to 4th rotations of the "normal game state" or the small hit, that is, the "general figure high probability time shortening state" (eg, the first game state) At the timing when the dynamic display of the special symbols that become the 100th spin of the 100th spin or the small win ends, and the consecutive game state ends and shifts to the "normal game state" (for example, the second game state), the second special The stop pattern table 202d of the dynamic display (for example, specific conditions) that can remain as the reserved ball of the pattern is set individually, and any number of reserved balls is set for a certain period of time (for example, "0.5 seconds") It may be configured to be variable time. By configuring in this way, the end timing of the continuous game end effect executed at the time of the 100th round loss or small hit extraction in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" can be set in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". From the end of the dynamic display of the 100th spin loss or small win (for example, the first time), the dynamic display of the 100th spin loss or small win in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" At the end, extend the last dynamic display of the remaining 2nd special symbol reserved ball until the end (for example, the second time), and the dynamic display of up to 5 rotations as one ending performance It can be shown, and the degree of expectation of winning a big win can be increased in the continuous villa end presentation.

Also, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, any lottery result of the "probability fluctuation state" (loss, small hit or jackpot extraction) and any number of reserved balls for a certain period of time (for example, "0 .5 seconds”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the time from the jackpot game that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" to the winning of the next jackpot, and as a result, the "probability fluctuation state" can be achieved. From the big winning game to shift to the next big winning game, the third pattern display device 81 can make it look like one big winning game. In this case, during the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot state, the text message "Waiting for the jackpot" will continue to be displayed, and the dynamic display of special symbols will be limited to the mini reel display, and the jackpot will be won and the next It is constituted so as to switch to the jackpot performance again at the timing when the jackpot state starts. That is, the jackpot standby production is a production executed based on the execution of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", and the big hit production is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is an effect in a big win state derived by executing a dynamic display that becomes a big win.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. FIG. 13(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 13(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 14(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 14C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, and any of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation modes are not allocated. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

That is, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as On the other hand, in the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, each "reach display" is configured to be selected at the same rate.

Therefore, the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are selected so that only in the "non-reach" presentation mode, the long presentation mode and the middle presentation mode are different, so the A table 202d1 is selected in comparison with the B table 202d2. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance tends to become relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

In this way, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the pending variable production. configured to For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is relatively short is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Also, for example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64 (the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a), A "non-reach (long)" performance mode having a longer variable performance time than the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode is selected. As a result, the ``non-reach (long)'' performance mode with a longer variable performance time than when the ``non-reach (middle)'' presentation mode is selected can be performed, so that the ball enters the first starting port 64. - 特許庁It becomes easy to secure the time, and by increasing the possibility that a new start prize will occur during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is executed can be maintained. .

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64 , the determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variation performance based on the entry, substantially It is configured such that the same presentation mode is selected.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a losing variable performance, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance. The table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 have a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, or a "special reach" effect mode. are set to the same value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to .

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the "non-reach" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected. , and substantially the same presentation mode is selected, with only the time of the variable element of the "high-speed variation" being different. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same (of the same type) even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, the contents of the variable presentation to be executed are substantially the same (similar), and the pre-reading In the variable performance that is the target of the notice, it is possible to execute the performance that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice.

As the look-ahead effect, a so-called look-ahead continuous effect (for example, the first effect) may be performed in which the effect is continuously performed across a plurality of dynamic displays (variable effects) (for example, period setting means). good. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state" in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the upper second starting hole 71 (for example, the second condition) than to win the first starting hole 64 (for example, the first condition), the second special When the fluctuation production of the symbol is performed with priority over the fluctuation production of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation), the start winning that can generate the dynamic display of the first special symbol (for example, the first 1 condition is satisfied) are acquired and the value is stored in the first reserved ball number counter 203a (for example, the first calculation means), corresponding to the dynamic display of the plurality of first special symbols It is configured to perform the above-mentioned look-ahead continuous effect. Here, in the situation where the look-ahead continuous effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, that is, before the execution time of the look-ahead continuous effect elapses, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is generated. When the starting winning prize (for example, the second condition is established), the variable production of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable production of the first special symbol. Effect ending means), configured to execute a variable effect (for example, a second effect) of a second special symbol indicating whether the game state can change depending on whether or not the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, for example, when game specifications such as a big win are determined when the look-ahead continuous effect is performed for a predetermined number of times, the variation corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol won on the way By executing the look-ahead continuous performance also in the performance, for example, by continuing the look-ahead continuous notice for a predetermined number of times or more, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in game specifications such as confirmation of a big win, and to prevent the occurrence of inconsistencies in the content of performance. Since it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for the game to occur, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”.

Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, it is set so that the "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14(a), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode ("0" to " 99"), the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, and each of the "reach display" effect modes are not assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Therefore, "probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" dynamic display that becomes a loss or a small hit of the first special symbol The stop type of is set to always be a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode. In addition, the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latency probability fluctuating state", which is a loss or a small hit, is always set to be a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14(b), in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "normal reach" effect mode ("0" to "99"). The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the stop type of the dynamic display that becomes a loss or a small hit of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is set to always be the "normal reach" effect mode.

By configuring in this way, the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" can be executed for a longer time than the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol can be executed. During the execution of the dynamic display, by winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be stopped as a losing symbol, which is recommended as a game specification. By reducing the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the ball is awarded to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a that causes the dynamic display of the special symbol that does not exist , it is possible to reduce the efficiency of giving the game value. As a result, it is possible to make the player hesitate to execute the dynamic display of the special symbols for which the dynamic display is not encouraged, thereby suppressing the execution of a game different from the assumed game specifications, thereby preventing the player from entering the hall. disadvantage can be reduced.

On the other hand, even if a small win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the motion of the first special symbol is performed based on the small win of the second special symbol. The display is configured not to stop (abort). For example, in the "normal game state", when a relatively long effect (for example, a "special reach" effect mode of a big hit, etc.) is executed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a right hit is erroneously executed. It is possible that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed by playing the game. In this case, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is interrupted by deriving a small win in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the big win is won despite the great effort. There is a risk that the player will suffer a great loss because the jackpot will not be awarded. Therefore, even if a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, by continuing the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed, an unexpected disadvantage to the player. can be prevented in advance.

In addition, when a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of any special symbol, the other special symbol may be stopped (discontinued, interrupted). Also, while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stopped (stopped, interrupted) in the derivation of the small winning in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the derivation of the small winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol It may be configured to stop (stop, interrupt) the dynamic display of one special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14(c), in the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the F table 202d6, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Therefore, as shown in the C table 202d3, in the variable effect at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the "special reach" effect mode>"super reach" effect mode>"normal reach" effect mode, and the A table 202d1, B As shown in the table 202d2 and the F table 202d6, in the variable effect at the time of losing, the selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "normal reach" effect mode > "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. there is Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player by the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the type of special symbol, the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of pending balls of the variable effect at that time By determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, the game By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on the situation in which is performed, a performance mode for enhancing the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be selected.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Also, it may be configured to select the effect mode based on the total reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Furthermore, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", the number of pending balls at the time of deciding the pre-reading notice execution The number of pending balls at the time of execution of the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first reservation first to fourth areas. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a Of the second reserve first to fourth areas provided in the second reserve ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserve area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored stored in

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determine the time of variation. The audio ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the detailed pattern variation mode based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. Also, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the variation pattern table 202e, a variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss/small hit used when the first special symbol is lost, and a variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 big win used when the first special symbol is a big win. A pattern table 202e2, a special figure 2 loss/small winning variation pattern table 202e3 used when the second special symbol is lost, and a special figure 2 big winning variation pattern table 202e4 used when the second special symbol is a big hit are prepared. It is

FIG. 15(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e1 for a special figure 1 loss/small hit stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 15(b) is a special figure stored in the ROM 202 It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for 1 jackpot. In addition, FIG. 16(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e3 for the special figure 2 loss/small hit stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 16(b) is stored in the ROM 202 It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing or small hit, "E0: non-reach / long" referred when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and "non-reach (middle) 'E1: non-reach/middle' referred to when the production mode is determined, and 'E2: non-reach/short' referred to when the 'non-reach (short)' effect mode is determined , "E3: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, "E4: super reach" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined, and "special It is divided into "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Reach" effect mode is determined.

In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E3: Normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined For "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined.

A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), that is, When the value is a loss or a small hit, the stop pattern table 202d is based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1. is selected, and an effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected effect mode, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 is determined. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is It is determined as a variation pattern in the suspended variation performance.

In the special figure 1 loss/small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when the first special symbol is lost or a small hit, "E0: non-reach/long" has an overall fluctuation time of "15 seconds". One variation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time") of "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high-speed variation", the variable element of "low-speed variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" A variable element, a "revariation" variable element, is provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. The variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production when the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). ), and when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the like is selected, "5 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (medium)"), When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, the change effect is performed for "2 seconds" at the beginning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed change (short)"). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "10 seconds" is executed, and it is determined whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled and varied to generate "ready-to-win display". It is a variable element to show. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are selected, and the "non-reach (long)" production mode, " When the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected, it is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation".

That is, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each pattern row of the third pattern display device 81 is changed to "low-speed fluctuation is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop) without going through the variable elements of . In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the variable effect may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the variable elements of "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds". Furthermore, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "2 seconds".

The variation element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach formation symbol") in the two symbol rows that stop first in the variation element of "low speed variation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur depending on the result of the variation of the symbol row. This "normal reach" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" after the "low speed change" variable element when the "normal reach" effect mode or the like is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the "super reach" A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The variation element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variation element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable is performed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a special effect (for example, "competition effect") different from the predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "160 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" develops directly without going through the variable element of "normal reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so the "loss display" or " If you go in the case of "small hit display", there will be a discrepancy in the performance. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-fluctuation" is selected only in the big hit fluctuation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b)), and the losing/small hit fluctuation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3. (See FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a)) are configured not to be selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach/middle" includes "only "high-speed variation (medium)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "only the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (medium)"" It is "0 to 9" and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (medium)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed fluctuation (medium)" fluctuation element" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: non-reach/short" includes "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "2 seconds" One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" It is "0 to 9", and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" variation element + variation element of “normal reach”” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( "0 to 9") is associated with "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach'". In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Super Reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "super reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Special reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "special reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "Variable element of 'special reach'" is selected.

In addition, since the variation pattern at the time of losing or small hit of the first special symbol is determined as the variation pattern as it is by the performance mode, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. . In addition, although selection is performed using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used together for selection (selection of presence/absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the first special symbol is hit will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reservation ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 1 By referring to the table 202c1, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two fluctuation patterns are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 15B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 15(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured to select a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'". Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 15(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss/small hit referred to when the second special symbol is lost or small hit will be described. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value (jackpot random value) for a jackpot, that is, a loss or a small hit. If it is a value, refer to the reservation number table 202c2 for special figure 2, select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reservation balls at that time, and the same reservation An effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected effect mode, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 is determined. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is It is determined as a variation pattern in the suspended variation performance.

In the special figure 2 loss/small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when the second special symbol is lost or a small hit, "E0: non-reach/long" includes the total fluctuation time "15 seconds" " One variation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time") of "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

In addition, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E1: non-reach middle" cannot be selected as an effect mode, so it is provided in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3. and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E2: non-reach/short" includes "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with a total variation time of "2 seconds" One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" It is "0 to 9", and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (short)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: normal reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" variation element + variation element of “normal reach”” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( "0 to 9") is associated with "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach'". In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E4: Super Reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with total variation time of "60 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "Super Lee" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, the variable pattern is always ""High speed change (long)" variable element + "Low speed change" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E5: Special Reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "special reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" variable element + variable element of “special reach”” is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(b), the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 to be referenced when the second special symbol is hit will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 2 By referring to the table 202c2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two fluctuation patterns are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of “variation factor of” is likely to be selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variable element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" ” variable element + “re-fluctuation” variable element” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured to select a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'". Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Here, referring to FIGS. 17 to 21, in each game state, the winning manner of the ball to the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, The progress of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display (dynamic display, hereinafter the same) of the first special symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second special symbol (hereinafter, "special The relationship between the progress of the variable display of "symbol 2") and the driving mode of the ordinary electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65 will be described. Also, in FIGS. 18 and 19, the case where the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reach the ceiling in the variable display of each of the special symbols 1 and 2 in the "normal game state" will be described.

FIG. 17 shows the detection timing of the ball at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the normal symbol in the left-handed game at the time of the "normal game state". It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display, the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the normal electric part 72 or the variable winning device 65. Moreover, FIG. 18 is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time reduction state". Furthermore, FIG. 19 is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time reduction state". In addition, FIG. 20 shows that in the right-handed game at the time of "probability fluctuation state" and "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", through gate 67, first start port 64, upper second start port 71 or lower second start The relationship between the detection timing of the ball in the mouth 71a, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the special symbol 1, and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the normal electric part 72 or the variable winning device 65 is schematically shown. It is a timing chart schematically shown. Furthermore, FIG. 21 shows the detection timing of the ball at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a in the right-handed game during the "latent probability fluctuation state", It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the normal electric part 72 or the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in the "normal game state", the right-handed game is not encouraged (deprecated, prohibited), and the right-handed game in the game state is substantially difficult to execute, so the game A description of the right-handed game in the state is omitted. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", left-handed games are not encouraged (left-handed games When executed, it is difficult for the player to obtain game value), and the left-handed game in this game state is not encouraged as a game specification, so the explanation regarding the left-handed game in this game state is omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 17, when the ball is shot in the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the ball is not detected in the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass only in the right-handed game. Since the variable display of the symbols is not executed, the normal electric solenoid that is opened based on the result of the variable display of the normal symbols is not driven either. Also, when the ball is shot in the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the ball is not detected at the upper second start port 71 and the lower second start port 71a through which the ball can pass only in the right-handed game. It is configured.

On the other hand, a ball shot in a left-handed game in the “normal game state” can enter the first start port 64 . Then, based on the winning to the first starting port 64, the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed. The variable display of this special symbol 1 is executed in '5 seconds' at the shortest and '190 seconds' at the longest, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win or a loss.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. In addition, when a small win is derived, the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, but the opening time is as short as "0.1 second" (see FIG. 23). Even if a right-handed game is played at the time of winning, the ball shot by the right-handed game flows down the right side of the board surface, and the variable prize winning device 65 is in a closed state by the time it reaches the variable prize winning device 65. Therefore, the variable prize winning device 65 is configured so as to make it difficult for balls to win prizes. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small hit is won in the variable display of the special symbol 1, the right hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is turned off, and the main display right The hitting instruction 89 is also in a non-display state. Further, as described above, the small hit in the variable display of the special symbol 1 serves to stop the variable display of the special symbol 2 being executed in the "normal game state".

For this reason, the small win of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" is regarded as a role equivalent to a loss for the player, so the right-handed game is not performed when the small win is won, and the left-handed game is continued. is configured to

On the other hand, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, when the jackpot game is won, the jackpot game is played by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "big jackpot open/close solenoid") a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time. (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time "1 second". Opening time "30 seconds". Ending time "10 seconds".) Turns on and the variable winning device 65 is released. . At this time, the player is urged to change the shooting mode from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and a large amount of prize balls can be won by winning the balls to the open variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, in the jackpot ending, the total number of prize balls won by the player until the transition from the "normal game state" to the jackpot game state and again to the "normal game state" is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured to execute a notification effect (predetermined effect).

In addition, in the "normal game state", if the ball wins in the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed, the special symbol 2 will be lost. The variable display is configured so that the "normal reach" production mode of "20 seconds" is uniformly selected, and the variable display of the "non-reach" production mode of special symbol 1 is executed at maximum "15 seconds". configured to be Further, about half of the variation display of the special symbol 1 is configured so that a small win can be won (see FIG. 7), and the winning of the special symbol 1 to the small win causes the variation of the special symbol 2 being executed. The display is configured to stop as a lost symbol. By configuring in this way, when the ball is made to enter the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, which causes the variable display of the special symbols which are not encouraged as a game specification, the special symbol 2 By lowering the execution efficiency of the variable display, it is possible to lower the efficiency of giving the game value and give priority to the giving of the game value based on the big hit of the variable display of the special symbol 1. - 特許庁

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, in the "normal game state", the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 1, and the case of shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, a predetermined number of times ("900 times" in the first embodiment) is continuously displayed in the dynamic display. When a big win is not won, that is, when either a failure or a small win appears continuously for a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display, as a relief measure for the player, the special symbol big win probability and the normal Although the winning probability of the pattern is in a low probability state, the change time of the normal pattern is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened. .

As shown in FIG. 18, the variable display of the "899th rotation" and the "900th rotation" in the special symbol low probability state is executed by the variation display of the special symbol 1, and the end of the "900th rotation" variation display. At the same time, it reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 1. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the variation effect of the special symbol 1 of "899th rotation" and "900th rotation" is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time as the "900th rotation" is completed, the ceiling In order to reach and shift to the “normal figure low probability time shortening state”, the main display right hitting instruction 89 and production hitting method instruction (main display right hitting instruction 89 and production right hitting instruction 81d. Fig. 57 (d ).) to suggest to the player that he/she should play a right-handed game.

When the right-handed game is started by this suggestive display, the ball is first detected at the through gate 67 arranged at a position through which almost all the balls fired in the right-handed game can pass. Then, based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, variable display of normal symbols is executed. Variable display of this normal pattern, because it is a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", as well as "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", uniformly executed in "0.1 seconds" and is configured to derive a result of either hit or miss. In this "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", although the probability of winning in the variable display of normal patterns is low, it is configured to win with a certain probability (that is, "70%"). In addition, it is configured such that the time for which the ordinary electric player 72 is opened when winning is "5.8 seconds" and the number of times of opening is once. Therefore, by opening the normal electric combination 72, most of the balls fired in the right-handed game can enter the lower second starting port 71a arranged on the lower side of the normal electric combination 72 when viewed from the front. In addition, the ball shot in the right-handed game can also enter the upper second starting port 71, which is always open right above the front view. In addition, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the first starting port 64, which can win the ball only in the left-handed game.

Then, in the right-handed game in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning of the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, this special The fluctuation display of the symbol 2 is executed in 2 seconds at the shortest and 190 seconds at the longest, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win or a loss.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a small win is derived, as a small win game, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum "1.5 seconds"). and the variable winning device 65 is opened.

Here, as described above, the variable prize winning device 65 is arranged downstream of the normal electric element 72 in the flow direction, and in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the normal electric element 72 is "5 It is configured to provide a .8 second release. In addition, it is configured so that it takes about "2 seconds" to completely roll from the right end to the left end of the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric member 72. As shown in FIG. For this reason, the haunting plate 72a is easily opened while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the haunting plate 72a during the closing time of the normal electric ball 72, and most of the balls fired in the right-handed game are the normal electric ball. The configuration is such that the ball enters the inside 72 and is difficult for the ball to reach the variable winning device 65 located downstream of the normal electric element 72 . Therefore, in the small winning in the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "general figure low probability time shortening state", it is difficult to win the variable winning device 65 even if the variable winning device 65 is opened by the small winning. This makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball based on a prize awarded to the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the jackpot game is performed by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time). "1 second", opening time and ending time "10 seconds".) is turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is released. At this time, since the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are equivalent to the "normal game state", the closed state of the normal electric combination 72 is longer, so the balls fired in the right-handed game appear and disappear. It rolls over the upper surface of 72a from the right end to the left end, and can enter the open variable prize winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, in the "normal game state", the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the case of shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, after the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 1 "899th rotation", the variable display of the "60 seconds" "super reach" effect mode is executed. Then, during the execution of the variable display of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1, the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 for shooting the ball, and the ball is shot into the right-handed game area. A ball shot in a hitting game enters an upper second starting port 71.例文帳に追加Then, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is uniformly executed in "20 seconds" in the case of a loss or a small hit. be.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state". Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1 is executed, and started during the execution of the variable display of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1. Regarding the variable display of the special symbol 2, it is executed only in the special figure 2 variation area 88b and the special figure 2 mini reel display (the special figure 2 variation area 88b in FIG. 57 (c) and the special figure 2 mini reel 81b). And, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 2 of "20 seconds", the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed the variable display of the "super reach" production mode of "60 seconds". Although the variable display of "20 seconds" ended first, and the variable display of special symbol 1 was initially the variable display of "900th rotation", the variable display of "20 seconds" of special symbol 2 was not performed. It becomes the variable display of "the 900th rotation."

Then, it reaches the ceiling at the same time as the end of the variable display of "20 seconds" of the special symbol 2, and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". That is, during the execution of the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1 in the third symbol display device 81, it will shift from the "normal game state" to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state".

Here, in the case of the display control of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the conventional pachinko machine, during the execution of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 "super reach" effect mode "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" , the main display right hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction are displayed during the execution of the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode. When such an effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the player is most interested in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode with a high expectation of a big win in the "normal game state". In the meantime, a display suggesting a right-handed game suddenly appears, and there is a risk that the player will be aroused by the game. In addition, during the execution of the first special symbols with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the display suggesting the right-handed game appears, and should the right-handed game be started? No, there is a risk of being confused and confused about the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in order to suppress such arousal of the player and avoid confusion about the game method, the variation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 When the game state is switched during the execution of the performance, it is configured to execute the hitting instruction for performance after the end of the variable performance being executed. By constructing in this way, while maintaining interest in the variable performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can execute an appropriate game according to the performance hitting instruction displayed thereafter. can. Incidentally, the method of controlling the display contents of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 56. FIG. Also, in FIG. 19, the timing chart after shifting to "normal low probability time reduction state" is the same as the timing chart after shifting to "normal low probability time reduction state" in FIG. omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 19, in the "normal game state", the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the case of shifting to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" was described, but in the explanation of FIG. It is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal figure high probability time shortened state", first, almost all the balls shot in the right-handed game A ball is detected at a through gate 67 arranged at a passable position. Then, based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, variable display of normal symbols is executed. The variable display of this normal pattern is uniformly executed in "0.1 seconds" in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and is configured to derive the result of either winning or losing. It is In the "probability variable state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the probability of winning in the variable display of normal patterns is high ("99%"), and the normal electric role 72 in the case of winning It is configured such that the opening time is "5.8 seconds" and the number of times of opening is one. Therefore, the ball launched in the right-handed game enters the lower second starting port 71a arranged on the lower side of the normal electric combination 72 when viewed from the front by the normal electric combination 72 being in an open state. In addition, the ball shot in the right-handed game can also enter the upper second starting port 71, which is always open right above the front view. In addition, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the first starting port 64, which can win the ball only in the left-handed game.

Then, in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a is executed, and the variable display of this special symbol 2 is executed in ``2 seconds'' at the shortest and ``190 seconds'' at the longest, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win, or a loss. there is

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a small win is derived, as a small win game, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum "1.5 seconds"). and the variable winning device 65 is opened.

Here, as described above, the variable winning device 65 is arranged downstream of the normal electric element 72 in the flow direction. is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" with a certain probability, the ball fired in the right-handed game will win the normal electric combination 72 due to the opening of the common electric combination 72. , so that it is difficult to reach the variable winning device 65 located on the downstream side of the ordinary electric circuit 72 . Therefore, it is difficult to win the ball to the variable winning device 65 in the small winning with the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "probability variable state" or the "general figure high probability time shortening state". It is configured such that it is difficult to obtain prize balls based on the winning of 65.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the jackpot game is performed by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time). "1 second", opening time and ending time "10 seconds".) is turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is released. At this time, the player is urged to continue the right-handed game, and the ball can be entered into the open variable winning device 65 to win a large amount of prize balls.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21, when a ball is shot in a right-handed game in the "latent probability variable state", first, almost all of the balls shot in a right-handed game are arranged at positions that can pass through. A ball is detected at the through gate 67 . Then, based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, variable display of normal symbols is executed. This variable display of normal symbols is uniformly executed in "15 seconds" in the "latency probability variable state", and is constructed so as to derive the result of either winning or losing. In the "latent probability variable state", the probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is low ("70%"), and the opening time of the normal electrode 72 when winning is "0.1 second". , and is configured to be opened once. For this reason, in the "latent probability variable state", the closing period of the normal electric combination 72 is long, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can win a prize when the normal electric combination 72 is opened. It becomes difficult to enter the starting port 71a, and while the ordinary electric mechanism 72 is closed, the upper surface of the ordinary electric mechanism 72 rolls from the right end to the left end. It becomes possible to flow down to the device 65 side. In addition, the ball shot in the right-handed game can enter the upper second starting port 71 which is always open right above the front view. In addition, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the first starting port 64, which can win the ball only in the left-handed game.

Then, in the right-handed game in the "latency probability variable state", the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning to the upper second start port 71, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is the shortest "2 Seconds”, the longest being “190 seconds”, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win or a loss.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a small win is derived, as a small win game, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum "1.5 seconds"). and the variable winning device 65 is opened.

As described above, in the "latent probability variable state", the closed period of the normal electric element 72 is long, and the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric element 72 from the right end to the left end, It is possible to flow down to the side of the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the ordinary electric wire 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a small hit is derived in the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the variable winning device 65 is opened, so that the ball can be won in the opened variable winning device 65, and a prize ball can be won ( So-called small hit rush state). Here, in the "latency probability fluctuation state" (for example, the first game state), when winning a small winning game that can occur in the "latency probability fluctuation state" (for example, the first event), the variable winning device 65 can be released (for example, the second game state). Then, in the probability exclusive production (for example, the first production) that can be started on the condition that it is in the "latency probability fluctuation state", a production is executed to determine whether a big win or a small win is achieved, and the probability exclusive production is executed. During execution, if it is shifted from the "latent probability fluctuation state" to the small hit game state, in the state where the latent probability exclusive production is continued (for example, production continuation means), additionally small hit production in the small game game (for example , second effect). In this case, in the small win effect, the display of the number of game balls obtained and the display of the number of winning small wins (for example, related effect) are configured to be executable in a situation where the probability exclusive effect is being executed. In addition, the display of the number of game balls and the display of the number of small hits are configured to be executed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the probability exclusive effect is displayed. In addition, during execution of the probability-only effect, the display of the number of game balls and the display of the number of small hits are continuously displayed.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the jackpot game is performed by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time "1 second", opening time and ending time "10 seconds".) is turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is released. At this time, the player is urged to continue the right-handed game, and the ball can be entered into the open variable winning device 65 to win a large amount of prize balls.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The normal figure per counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). In addition, when the counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal pattern (value = "0 to 99"), timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) 1 It is updated twice and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)), and the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 In, it is stored in one of the general pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203i of the RAM 203 in the general pattern reservation area. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i, and the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j hit judgment.

The value of the random number that becomes the winning pattern is set by the random number table 202h per normal pattern stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 70/100 in the low probability state and 99/99 in the high probability state). 100 etc.), and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern retention ball execution area 203j of the RAM 203 matches the random number value set by the random number table 202h per normal pattern. , it is determined to be a hit. Then, the normal pattern variation table 202i is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set (for example, "15 seconds" when the time saving function is not activated, "0.1 second" when the time saving function is activated) etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the normal electric role opening table 202j is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is set (for example, when the time saving function is not activated, "0.1 second" x 1 time, when the time saving function is activated is "5.8 seconds" x 1 time, etc.), and during the opening time, the hive plate 72a of the ordinary electric terminal 72 is opened, and during that time, the ball can enter the lower second start port 71a. be.

On the other hand, when the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area does not match the value of the random number set by the random number table 202h per normal pattern, it is determined to be lost. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the normal pattern variation table 202i according to the game state, and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal pattern display device 83, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol (normal symbol). Lights up. The random number table 202h per normal pattern, the normal pattern fluctuation table 202i and the normal electric role release table 202j will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing. In order to wait for the control devices 110, 111, 113, and 114 to start up normally when the power is restored, the third pattern display device 81 has a predetermined period of time (for example, fixed at "30 seconds"). return screen (for example, black screen display, suggestive display) is displayed (for example, execution means for a predetermined period). While the return screen is displayed, when the start opportunity (start winning) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is acquired (for example, the execution condition is satisfied), the display state of the return screen is maintained. , the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured to wait (suspend) the execution of the normal variation effect (for example, the second effect). On the other hand, the special symbol display device 37 performs dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 does not start the normal variable effect (for example, specific effect) ( For example, specific effect non-start means), in a predetermined area (for example, lower right part of the screen) of the third symbol display device 81, a variable display related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, a circle Flashing/lighting of symbols, etc. So-called fourth symbol. The predetermined area is a display area that is smaller than the area in which normal variation effects are performed. Then, when the display time of the return screen has elapsed, the return screen is ended (for example, suggestion display end means), and the normal fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol acquired during the display of the return screen. It is configured to execute an effect (for example, specific effect) from the middle (for example, specific effect executing means). In this case, the variable display displayed on the return screen may be continuously executed (for example, related continuation means) even while the normal variable effect is being executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first held ball number counter 203a, a second held ball number counter 203b, a first held ball storage area 203d, a second held ball storage area 203e, a first held ball execution area 203f, and a second held ball execution area. Area 203g, normal figure reservation ball number counter 203h, normal figure reservation ball storage area 203i, normal figure reservation ball execution area 203j, probability variable flag 203k, time reduction high probability flag 203m, time reduction low probability flag 203n, time reduction counter 203o, ceiling reach count It has at least a counter 203p and a ceiling set flag 203q.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is a special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed on the display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) is up to four times. A counter that counts up to

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 32 (see S306 of ). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 35).

The second reserved ball number counter 203b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, is the upper second starting port detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. 71 or based on the start winning to the lower second start port 71a, dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the third pattern variable effect) up to four times.

As with the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, every time the start winning prize to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a is detected and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, the maximum value "4 ” (see S310 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is executed (see S5302 in FIG. 36).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the first reserved ball. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the number command or the second reserved ball number command (see S313 in FIG. 32). The first reserved ball number command is issued every time the start winning to the first start opening 64 is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, the second reserved ball number command is issued to the upper second start opening 71. Or, it is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the second reserved ball number counter 203b to the lower second start port 71a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 dynamically displays the first special symbol or second special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 according to the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. Also, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is detected, the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 The first reserved ball number command Or by transmitting the second pending ball number command, the pending ball number of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of each special symbol managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is suspended in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (variable performance) that is displayed, the deviation is corrected by the next received first number-of-held-balls command or second number-of-held-balls command. be able to.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command In the number of balls command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b incremented by 1, but also the trigger for adding the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b Along with the above starting winning, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) are also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is the first The number of pending pitches command or the second number of pending pitches command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is Before the variable performance based on each value is executed, it is read ahead, and how the variable performance becomes (whether it becomes a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed. Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

In addition, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a Generates the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command at the timing of the ball entering the ball, and commands similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command based on the ball entry command) and send it to the audio ramp controller 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the jackpot A memory for storing each value of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), each The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 203f starts execution, or the first special symbol jackpot lottery that is being executed, the dynamic display and variation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as effect setting.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation performance. In order to execute the processing such as, among the data corresponding to the start winning stored in the above-described first reserved ball storage area 203d (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1), the data corresponding to the oldest start winning Data is shifted into this first hold ball execution area 203f. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the second reserved ball execution area 203g starts execution, or the second special symbol jackpot lottery or small lottery that is being executed, the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as target display and variable effect setting.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation performance. In order to execute such processing, one of the data corresponding to the start winning stored in the above-described second reserved ball storage area 203e (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) is shifted to this second hold ball execution area 203g.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the special symbol display device. 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the dynamic display and variable effects.

As described above, the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect include the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f are the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning). , and the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are stored when the ball enters the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (start winning). Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 is stored.

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the empty areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas). remembered. In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first starting port 64 that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first starting port 64 that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

Also, the first reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first When data is stored in the first reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203d, the data stored in the first reserved first area is stored in each area 203f1 to the first reserved ball execution area 203f. 203f4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 35), and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the lottery result Determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop category command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, Variation production of the first special symbol is performed.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect of the first special symbol, it determines whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. As a result of the judgment, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area of the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved first area becomes empty, so the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Shift processing is performed to move the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the first special symbol variation effect is made is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d ) is stored with data. In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (second to fourth) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Also, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the first special symbol variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 only stores the data of the first reserved second area. , shift to the first reserved first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

Next, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 Each value of ) is stored up to four times. Data is stored in order from the smallest area. That is, the area with a smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the start winning to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a that is older in terms of time, and the second reservation first area stores , the data corresponding to the start winning to the oldest upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is stored.

Also, the second reserved ball execution area 203g is composed of only one area. Like the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the second reserved ball execution area 203g includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203g1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203g4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second When data is stored in the second reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is stored in each area 203g1 to the second reserved ball execution area 203g. 203g4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g is referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 36), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the lottery result. Determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect of the second special symbol, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203g of the second reservation ball execution area 203g. Shift to area 203g1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203g2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203g4.

Then, when the data shift to the second reserved ball execution area 203g is completed, the second reserved first area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to move the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect of the second special symbol is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e ) is stored with data. In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (second to fourth) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Also, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the second special symbol variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 stores only the data of the second reserved second area. , shifts to the second reserved first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

In this way, data relating to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and data relating to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are separately stored, and dynamic display is performed based on each data. By doing, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The normal pattern holding ball number counter 203h displays the normal pattern based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. It is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display of normal symbols performed by the device 83 up to four times.

As with the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203h is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of held balls for variable display relating to normal symbols increases, 1 is added to the maximum value "4" (see S405 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal pattern is executed (see S705 in FIG. 47).

The normal-pattern holding ball storage area 203i is a memory for storing the normal-pattern per counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of the ball through the through gate 67. FIG. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern from the counter buffer 203c, and stores the normal pattern reserved ball. Store in area 203i. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i has four reserved areas (normal pattern holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

The normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j is a memory for storing data (value of the normal pattern winning counter C4) to be referred to in the normal symbol winning lottery and variable display processing that starts execution or is being executed. be.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal design, in order to execute the processing such as the setting of the normal design winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal design display device 83, the above-mentioned normal design reservation ball Of the data stored in the storage area 203i (the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern), one data is shifted to this normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j will be described. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to perform processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. be.

As described above, the normal symbol winning lottery and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83 use the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery. The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203i stores the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67 .

The general map holding ball storage area 203i is composed of four holding areas (the general map holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (normal pattern reservation 1st to 4th area) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern that stores the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern.

In this general pattern holding ball storage area 203i, the data acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (the value of the counter C4 per general pattern) is stored up to 4 times, but in that case, 4 holding Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant areas (1st to 4th areas for normal map reservation). In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored, and the data of the ball passing through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the first area of the normal map reservation area. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i, the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j is provided with a normal pattern per random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the normal pattern per counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, the data stored in the first normal pattern reservation area of the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203i is transferred to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203j. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j is referred to in the normal pattern variation process (see FIG. 47), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed, and the contents of the variable display to decide. In the normal symbol display device 83, under the control of the main controller 110, variable display is performed based on the determined contents.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of normal symbols, the random value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern in the first area of the normal pattern retention ball storage area 203i. is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern of the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j is completed, the normal pattern holding first area becomes empty, so it is stored in each area (2nd to 4th) of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203i. Shift processing is performed to shift the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only for the general pattern reservation areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203i.

Here, the data shift performed with respect to each reservation area in the normal map reservation ball storage area 203i will be described. For example, when it is determined to start variable display of normal symbols, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i Suppose data is stored. In this state, the data of the normal pattern reservation first area is shifted to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203j, and when the normal pattern reservation first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (2nd to 4th) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. In other words, the data of the 2nd area of the general pattern reservation is shifted to the 1st area of the general pattern reservation, the data of the 3rd area of the general pattern reservation is shifted to the 2nd area of the general pattern reservation, and the data of the 4th area of the general pattern reservation is shifted to the 3rd area for general map reservation.

Also, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h when the start determination of the variable display of the normal pattern is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the normal pattern reserved second area to the normal pattern. Shift to the drawing reservation first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general pattern reservation area (third to fourth) where data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the general map reservation area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (reserved) in the normal drawing reservation area (second to fourth), so it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The probability variation flag 203k is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. The variable probability flag 203k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, in the case of the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "potential probability A", the probability variation flag 203k is set to ON (see S6102 or S6105 in FIG. 44). Then, when the jackpot is won, it is set to OFF (see S602 in FIG. 41). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable probability flag 203k is turned on, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed with reference to a jackpot random number table 202a for a high probability state as a special symbol high probability state. .

The time saving high probability flag 203m is in the on state "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "probability fluctuation state", which is a high probability state of normal symbols, and a shortening state of variable display time of normal symbols, This is a flag for indicating that the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in an extended open state. The time-saving high-accuracy flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 28). And, in the first embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is set to ON in the case of the jackpot type "probability variable A" or "time saving A" (see S6103 or S6106 in FIG. 44). After that, the value of the time saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0" in the time saving counting process (see S5513 in FIG. 37) executed in the fluctuation stopping process which is the process at the time of stopping the dynamic display of the special symbol. When and when the time-saving high-precision flag 203m is set to ON (see S5704 in FIG. 39), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S602 in FIG. 41) ).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving and high-probability flag 203m is turned on, as a high-probability state of normal symbols, the random number table 202h for normal symbols is referred to, and a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed. , the normal symbol variation table 202i is referred to as the shortened state of the normal symbol to set the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol opening table 202j is referred to as the extended open state of the normal symbol 72 to set the normal symbol 72. is opened.

The time reduction low probability flag 203n is in the ON state and is in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, while the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the normal electric role 72 is open for a long time. This is a flag to indicate that the The time-saving low-probability flag 203n is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 28). Then, in the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed more than a total of "899 times" (that is, "900 times" or more) in the low probability state of the special symbol and the ceiling reaching number of times is reached , The time-saving low-probability flag 203n is set to ON in order to shift to the "normal pattern low-probability time shortening state" (see S5806 in FIG. 40). After that, when the value of the time saving counter 203o is not a value larger than "0" in the time saving counting process (see S5513 in FIG. 37) executed in the fluctuation stopping process executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped And, when the time saving low probability flag 203n is set to ON (see S5705 in FIG. 39), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S602 in FIG. 41) .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time saving low probability flag 203n is turned on, the special symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol is also in a low probability state, and the random number table 202h per normal symbol is referred to. However, the normal symbol variable display time is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202i as the normal symbol shortened state, and the normal symbol open state is set as the open extended state of the normal symbol 72. The table 202j is referred to and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is driven to open.

The time-saving counter 203o is a counter for determining the end condition 1 of the "time-saving function", and counts the number of times the dynamic display of each special pattern is executed after the jackpot ends and when it reaches the ceiling, and determines the time-saving end condition. is a counter for In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, time-saving end conditions are set differently depending on the number of executions of special symbols for each jackpot type, and when the set number of dynamic display executions of the special symbols is performed. , It is configured to terminate the "time saving function" being executed and shift from "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" to "normal game state".

The time saving counter 203o is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Also in the winning process (see S203 in FIG. 31), the value of the time saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" as the initialization process at the time of the big win (see S603 in FIG. 41). Then, after the jackpot ends when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203o is set to "100" (see S6107 in FIG. 44). Also, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the number of execution times of the dynamic display becomes more than "899 times", that is, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p described later becomes a value larger than "899". If there is and the ceiling setting completion flag 203q, which will also be described later, is not set to ON, the value of the time reduction counter 203o is set to "1140" (see S5804 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the value of the time reduction counter 203o is subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed once in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" ( See S5701 in FIG. 39).

Then, when the value of the time saving counter 203o becomes "0" (S5702 in FIG. 39: No), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of each special symbol is satisfied, and the time saving high accuracy that is turned on is determined. It is configured to turn off the flag 203m or the time saving low probability flag 203n (see S5704 or S5705 in FIG. 39) and end the "time saving function".

The ceiling reaching count counter 203p is a counter for counting whether or not to shift to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the number of execution times of dynamic display of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when dynamic display of special symbols is executed "900 times" in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p reaches "900". When it does, the game state is configured to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state".

This ceiling reaching counting counter 203p is set to "0" as an initial value in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S172 in FIG. 28). Then, in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, in the "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", dynamic display of special symbols is executed once. 1 is added every time (see S5801 in FIG. 40). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p reaches "900", if the ceiling setting completion flag 203q described later is not set to ON (that is, if it is OFF) , Set the value of the time saving counter 203o to "1140", set the time saving low accuracy flag 203n to ON (see S5804 and S5806 in FIG. 40), and shift to "ordinary figure low accuracy time shortening state".

It should be noted that the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is cleared to "0" at the beginning of the winning process when winning a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 41). Thus, every time a big win occurs, the number of times of reaching the ceiling is reset, and when the special pattern becomes a low probability state after the big win game, counting of the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is started, In the low probability state of the special symbols, when the period during which the special symbols are not won in the dynamic display reaches a predetermined period, a ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' is generated as a relief measure for the player. becomes possible.

The ceiling setting completion flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the ceiling reaching number once after the jackpot game. This ceiling set completion flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value in the startup processing of the pachinko machine 10 (see S171 in FIG. 28). Then, in the low-probability state of the special symbols, when the dynamic display of the special symbols does not win the jackpot "900 times" in succession, that is, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p reaches "900". , After the jackpot game, the ceiling function is set to ON assuming that it has been activated once (see S5805 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning a jackpot (see S602 in FIG. 41).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the ceiling setting completion flag 203q is set to ON, that is, when the ceiling function is activated even once after the jackpot game, the ceiling function is not generated again. By referring to the ceiling set flag 203q, the ceiling function to be activated after the jackpot game can be limited to once. It should be noted that the ceiling function may be configured to occur two or more times.

In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, when a big win is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a jackpot referred to for opening control of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is stored. A release table 202f is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the jackpot release table 202f will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot open table 202f stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, etc. (the number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes won, number of prize balls) and the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win are defined.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f includes the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, or the lower second starting port 71a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting port 64 and the upper second starting port) that are easy to win for each game state. 71 and the lower second starting port 71a may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 64, 71, 71a"). are separated.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", for "normal game state" to be referred to when winning the jackpot type "time saving A", "variable probability A" or "probability A", and "probability fluctuation state" , "Normal figure low probability time reduction state", "Normal figure high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability change state", referred to when winning the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "latency probability A" " Probability fluctuation state, low probability time reduction state, time reduction state, latency probability fluctuation state", and the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is defined.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (hereinafter referred to as the variable winning device 65 of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a may be referred to as a "big winning opening") is repeatedly opened and closed over 5 rounds. The opening time of the jackpot (the opening time may be hereinafter referred to as "OP time") is set to "30 seconds", and the interval is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round. The time (hereinafter, the interval time may be referred to as "IT time") is set to "1 second", and the jackpot ending time (hereinafter, the ending time may be referred to as "ED time"). It is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general figure high probability time reduction state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the state is shifted to the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. be. Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "probability A" is won, the state is changed to the "latency probability fluctuation state". In addition, it is the dynamic display of the second special design that can win the jackpot type "potential A" in the "normal game state", and the dynamic display of the second special design is recommended in the "normal game state". It is configured to be difficult to be executed in the left-handed game that is being played.

Next, in the "probability change state/low probability time reduction state/time reduction state/latency probability change state" of the jackpot release table 202f, when the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won, the variable prize device 65 is a big prize. The mouth opening/closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed over five rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the jackpot game ends when the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won After that, it is configured to shift to the "normal map high probability time shortening state".

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state/low probability time shortening state/time shortening state/latency probability fluctuation state" of the jackpot release table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability A" is won, the variable winning device 65 The winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed over five rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "latency probability A" After the end, it is configured to shift to the "latency probability change state".

In this way, in the "continuous" state in which the right-handed game is maintained and the special symbol jackpots occur frequently, the OP time, IT time, and ED at the time of the jackpot when one of the jackpot types is won. By configuring the time to be shorter than the OP time, IT time and ED time of the initial jackpot in the ``normal game state'', the time to complete the entire jackpot during the ``continuous game'' state is shortened and the ``continuous game'' state is achieved. , it is possible to shorten the arrival time to the next jackpot. As a result, the time until the next big win occurs in the "continuous" state can be shortened, and the time until the next big win arrives is prolonged in spite of the "continuous" state, thereby increasing the game of the player. By generating a series of big wins at an early stage while suppressing the excitement of the game, the player can feel refreshed and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the initial jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "continuous game state", It becomes possible to execute various productions. By configuring in this way, for example, explanation of the game method in the pachinko machine 10 at the OP time and ED time of the first big win (for example, suggestion of shooting mode, suggestion of prevention of forgetting to remove the card inserted in the card sand, future (explanation of the game state, etc.), and a performance to congratulate the first big win from the "normal game state" can be executed, making it easier for the player to understand the game method of the pachinko machine 10, and finally winning the big win. It is possible to perform a performance that contributes to improving the interest of the player by making the player feel.

In addition, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a at the time of the big win based on the big win type (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of prize balls and transition game state) are as described above. It is not limited to the embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of opening times (number of rounds) may be changed for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. It can be configured to change Since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to make a difference in the game value that is directly given according to the type of jackpot won.

Moreover, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types. Furthermore, the OP time and the ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set longer than the OP time and the ED time. Also, the minimum open time for one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, the OP time, and the ED time. Furthermore, at least one of OP time, IT time and ED time may be set to be the same time for each jackpot type. In addition, the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "latency probability fluctuation state" are changed to the OP time of the jackpot in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", Although the IT time and the ED time were configured to be shorter than each other, any one or more of the OP time, the IT time, or the ED time is configured to be shortened, and the other one or more of the OP time is configured to be shorter. , IT time, or ED time may be equal or longer.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, the small winning open table 202g will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small winning open table 202g stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The small winning opening table 202g is referred to at the time of the small winning of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on each special symbol, the opening mode of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (the number of rounds, the maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of prize balls) are stipulated. In addition, even if a small hit is won in any special symbol (excluding the transition to the "general figure low probability time reduction state"), the game state is configured not to be shifted.

First, the small hit opening table 202g is divided into opening modes and the like based on the types of special symbols, that is, the starting openings 64, 71, and 71a to be won. Specifically, for "special 1 small hit" that is referred to when winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol The opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a and the like are defined for "special figure 2 small hit" to be referred to.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the "special 1 small win" of the small win open table 202g, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, The large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the provided variable winning device 65 is opened and closed once (one round). Then, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of prizes to be won is set to "10", and the number of prize balls based on the winning is set to "10". ing. In the first embodiment, the opening time is set such that no more than 10 balls can win a prize within the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the small winning of the first special symbol. The opened big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be more easily closed under the condition of the maximum opening time than under the condition of the maximum winning number.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23, in the "special figure 2 small winning" of the small winning open table 202g, even if the small winning is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, The big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 provided in the game is opened and closed once (one round). Then, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is set to "1.5 seconds", the maximum number of prizes to be won is set to "10", and the number of prize balls based on the winning is set to "10". ing. In the first embodiment, the opening time is set such that no more than 10 balls can win a prize during the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the small winning of the second special symbol. The opened big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be more easily closed under the condition of the maximum opening time than under the condition of the maximum winning number.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c), the details of the normal pattern per random number table 202h, the normal pattern variation table 202i and the normal pattern opening table 202j will be described. First, FIG. 24( a ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202 h per general pattern stored in the ROM 202 .

As described above, the normal pattern per random number table 202h has a low probability of normal symbols in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state", the "latency probability fluctuation state", or the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". For the "normal pattern low probability state" used in the case of the state (period that is not "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (including special pattern jackpot), and pachinko machine 10 "Normal pattern high probability" used when the game state is "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" which is a state with a higher probability of winning normal patterns than "normal pattern low probability state" It is divided into two types, one for "state" and the other for "status". Then, the number of random numbers to be hits included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different between the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state", the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state" , The probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the normal pattern per counter C4 that becomes a win in the case of the "normal pattern low probability state" is 70, and the value "30 ~ 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202h per normal pattern. That is, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern low probability state" (that is, "normal game state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state") is 70/100, and the normal pattern It is set so that the hit can be easily derived in the variable display of.

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal pattern that becomes a hit in the case of "normal high probability state" is 99, and the value "1 to 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202h per normal pattern. ing. That is, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern high probability state" (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") is 99/100, and the normal pattern variable display is almost hit. set to be derived.

Thus, by changing the success/failure probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to create a difference between a situation in which the normal electric combination 72 is easy to open and a situation in which it is difficult to open. can. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is possible to enter the lower second starting port 71a because the normal electric terminal 72 is easily opened, or the normal electric terminal 72 is easy to open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower second start hole 71a because the state is more difficult to open, depending on the game state.

In particular, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, it becomes "normal symbol low probability state", the normal symbol variable display time is long, and the normal electric role 72 is difficult to open, furthermore, when it is opened. However, since the normal electric combination 72 is opened only for a short time, even if the ball is fired in a right-handed game, it is configured so that it is difficult to win the second start opening 71a below the "normal symbol high probability state". there is In addition, the first starting port 64 is not equipped with a device for assisting prize winning, such as the ordinary electric machine 72, and a through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow-down region of the ball fired in the left-handed game. Therefore, it is not a configuration in which the ball fired by the left-handed game easily enters the first start port 64 by the time saving function. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if a right-handed ball is hit, it is difficult for the right-handed ball to enter the lower second start hole 71a, and it is fired in a left-handed game. The ball must also enter the first start port 64 without using the time saving function, and is configured to enter the first start port 64 by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. there is In addition, in the "normal game state", by providing a plurality of types of variable display time of normal symbols and opening patterns of the normal electric combination 72, the player can enter the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state". It is more preferable to make it difficult to grasp the possible timing and to make it difficult to win a prize to the lower second starting port 71a. In addition, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is played, an error is notified due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, so that the player and the employee of the game hall By suggesting that the game mode is not encouraged, the player may be restrained from playing right-handed games.

Then, with reference to FIG.24(b), the detail of the normal pattern fluctuation table 202i for determining the variable display time of a normal pattern is demonstrated. FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal pattern fluctuation table 202i stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

Normal pattern fluctuation table 202i is for "normal game state/latency probability fluctuation state" referred to by "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state ”Or “normal pattern high probability time reduction state” is divided into two types for “probability fluctuation state / low probability time reduction state / time reduction state”. Then, the variable display times of the normal symbols set for the "normal game state/latency probability variable state" and "probability variable state/low probability time shortened state/time shortened state" are set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbols different in each game state, the time for deriving the success/fail result of the normal symbols in each game state is changed.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the normal symbol variable display time set in the case of the "normal game state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state" is "15 seconds". It is defined in the normal figure fluctuation table 202i so that it becomes. That is, in the "normal game state" or the "latency probability variable state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the derivation of the stop symbols is set to be "15 seconds".

In addition, the variable display time of the normal pattern set in the case of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state" or "normal high probability time reduction state" is set to "0.1 second" It is defined in the normal figure fluctuation table 202i. In other words, the time from the start of variable display of normal symbols in the "probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" until the stop design is derived is without omission It is set to be "0.1 second".

Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when the normal electrode 72 is released can be changed. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it hits the variable display caused by passing through the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is opened based on the hit, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow into the lower second starting port 71a as it is can be varied depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to vary the winning mode of one ball to the through gate 67 and the lower second start port 71a, and the game is different for each game state. can produce sex.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, the variable display time of normal symbols is short, the winning is easy, and the normal electric Since the opening time of the hand 72 is also long, the normal electric hand 72 is in an open (immersed) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 72, and the ball is fired by the right-handed game. can enter the lower second starting port 71a. In other words, the ball hit to the right in the "probability variable state" and the "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state" is configured so as to easily enter the lower second starting port 71a and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65. It is

In addition, among the gaming states in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", although it is more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", normal Since the variable display time of the pattern is short and the open time of the normal electric player 72 is also long, the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to be able to enter the lower second start port 71a. there is In other words, the ball hit to the right in the "low probability time reduction state" is configured to easily enter the lower second starting port 71a and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65.

On the other hand, among the game states in which the right-handed game is encouraged, in the "latent probability variable state", the variable display time of normal symbols is long, it is difficult to win a winning, and the normal electric role 72 is opened for a short time. Therefore, it is configured to make it difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter the lower second starting port 71a. Therefore, while the normal electric wire 72 is closed, the upper surface of the normal electric wire 72 can be rolled from the right end to the left end, and can flow down to the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the normal electric wire 72 when viewed from the front. , the ball hit to the right in the "latent probability variable state" is configured to easily enter the variable winning device 65 rather than entering the lower second starting port 71a.

Next, referring to FIG. 24(c), the normal electric service release table 202j will be described. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal electric service release table 202j stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The normal electric combination opening table 202j is referred to when a normal symbol win occurs, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of opening times of the normal electric combination 72 are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol win occurs.

The normal electric role open table 202j is divided into groups based on the game state in which the normal symbols are drawn. Specifically, for "normal game state / latent probability change state" referred to in "normal game state" and "latency probability change state", "probability change state", "normal figure low probability time reduction state" or The open state (open time) of the normal electric worker 72 is changed for "probability fluctuation state/low probability time shortening state/time shortening state" referred to in "general pattern high probability time shortening state".

As shown in FIG. 24(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric combination 72 is opened when the normal symbol is won. The number of times is 1, and the opening time is defined as "0.1 seconds" in the normal electric service opening table 202j. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric combination 72 is opened for "0.1 seconds" x 1 times = "0.1 seconds". is set to be

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the opening time of the normal electric role 72 set when winning the normal symbol is "5. 8 seconds” and the number of times of opening is set to 1 in the normal electric service opening table 202j. In other words, when the normal pattern is elected in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state" or "normal high probability time reduction state", the normal electric role 72 is "5.8 seconds" × It is configured to be opened once=“5.8 seconds”.

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the normal electric part 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric part 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the period during which the normal electric terminal 72 is open is long, so that it is easy to enter the lower second start opening 71a, or the normal electric terminal 72 is open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower second start hole 71a due to the short time to be in the game state.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it becomes a high probability state of normal patterns, the variable display time is short, normal electric The opening period of the winning combination 72 is lengthened so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can easily enter the lower second start hole 71a.

In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed game is encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", although it is a normal pattern low probability state, the variable display time is short, and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. It is configured such that the period becomes longer and the ball launched by the right-handed game easily enters the lower second starting port 71a.

Therefore, the ball hit to the right in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" and "normal high probability time shortening state" easily enters the lower second start port 71a, and the second special Since the number of reserved balls for dynamic display of symbols is likely to accumulate, the variation shortening function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbols is configured to be executed efficiently.

In this way, the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state or low probability state of the normal symbol, and the long or short time of the variable display time and the opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 are combined respectively. By providing each game state, it is possible to change the game property in each game state, provide a game with a wide variety of variations, and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the hit probability of variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more likely to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state", etc., any ratio may be used. The probability may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the low probability state of the normal pattern It may be configured so as not to win a prize at the time. Also, if the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state", it may be any time, for example, the variable display time of normal symbols in the "normal game state" is "30 seconds" or more. may be a long time (for example, "100 seconds") or a short time (for example, "1 second") less than "10 seconds".

Moreover, the open time and the number of open times of the ordinary electric circuit 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the open time of the normal electric combination 72, any open time may be used as long as it is more advantageous for the player to be in the "variable probability state" than in the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, " 3 times”). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "variable probability state" or the like may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds". (eg, “1 second”). Further, the number of opening times of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a number greater than "1 time" (for example, "5 times").

Next, with reference to Drawing 25, time saving end condition table 202k in a 1st embodiment is explained. Drawing 25 is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of time saving end condition table 202k memorized by ROM202 in a 1st embodiment. The time-saving end condition table 202k is referred to when the jackpot state ends or when the number of times the ceiling is reached is reached, and the termination conditions of the "time-saving function" given according to the jackpot type or ceiling function that won the jackpot are defined respectively. It is

As shown in FIG. 25, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the "normal game state", the "probability variation state" is set so that the high-probability short-time function is effective until the next jackpot. In addition, when the number of times of reaching the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state", the low probability time reduction function is set to be effective up to "1140 times" as a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state". Furthermore, in all game states (that is, "normal game state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state"), When the jackpot type "shortening of working hours A" is won, the high-probability short-time function is set to be effective up to "100 times" as "normal pattern high-probability time-reducing state". Also, in all game states (that is, "normal game state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state"), When winning the jackpot type "probability of latency A", the time saving function is not given as "latency probability fluctuation state", and the number of times of time saving is set to "0 times".

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes the buffer 203c for the counter shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which values such as Input/Output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 detects the balls that have won prizes in the winning holes 63, 64, 65, 71 and 71a, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the out hole 66. Various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches including a switch (for example, the big winning slot switch 65c, etc.) and a group of sensors, etc., a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a "setting change mode" A setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value and a RAM erasing switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected when the button is pressed.

Also, on the output side of the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special design display device 37, the normal design display device 83, the normal design reservation lamp 84, the variable winning device 65 opening and closing of the big winning opening A large winning opening solenoid 65b for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the plate 65a as an axis, a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric 72, and other solenoids 209 are connected. It is The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes effects, It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as the effect hitting method instruction described later, and the "holding change notice".

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the first embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and displays the third pattern on the display control device 114 based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes and produces the third pattern. It is used to control the display of usage instructions and "holding change notice". Note that the details of the effect hitting instruction will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 26, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d as fixed value data in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, or the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4) is changed. Executes control to determine the content (and execution time (timing)).

The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, and second reserved information At least a storage area 223f, a first execution information storage area 223g, a second execution information storage area 223h, an effect left-handed instruction executed flag 223i, and an effected right-handed instruction executed flag 223j are provided.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1225 in FIG. 53) . Then, regardless of whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is turned off when the first special symbol variation effect is set (see S1302 in FIG. 55).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, and the waiting first special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When the game state is the "normal game state" (see S1306 of FIG. 55: Yes), that is, when the game state encourages the variation effect of the first special symbol, the waiting state is A first special symbol variation effect setting process (see S1307 to S1309 in FIG. 55) for executing the first special symbol variation effect is performed.

In addition, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the game state is the first special symbol fluctuation effect is not encouraged "normal figure high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" , When it is "latency probability change state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" (see S1306 of FIG. 55: No), shift of the first reservation information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g described later Although the processing and the subtraction processing of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c are executed (see S1303 to S1305 in FIG. 55), the first special symbol variation effect setting processing (see S1307 to S1309 in FIG. 55) is executed. configured not to. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation production of the first special symbol is not encouraged "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state”, the third symbol display device 81 does not execute (display) the variable effect and the number of reserved balls related to the first special pattern, and executes (displays) only the recommended second special symbol variable effect and the number of reserved balls. can do.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 54) . Then, regardless of whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is turned off when the second special symbol variation effect is set (see S1311 in FIG. 55).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, and the waiting second special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When the game state is other than the "normal game state" (see S1315: No in FIG. 55), that is, the "probability fluctuation state" and "general figure high In the case of "certain time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state", the second special symbol variation performance for executing the second special symbol variation performance during the standby setting processing (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 55).

In addition, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, when the game state is the "normal game state" in which the first special symbol fluctuation effect is encouraged (S1315 in FIG. 55: Yes (see S1312 to S1314 in FIG. 55), although the shift processing of the second reservation information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h, which will be described later, and the subtraction processing of the sub-second reservation ball number counter 223d are executed (see S1312 to S1314 in FIG. 55). , The setting process of the second special symbol variation effect (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 55) is configured not to be executed. By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" in which the variation performance of the second special symbol is not encouraged, the third symbol display device 81 executes (displays) the variation performance and the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol. Instead, it is possible to execute (display) only the recommended first special symbol variation effect and the number of reserved balls.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a first special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command (the number of held balls command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first held ball number counter 223c It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first start port 64, When the first reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the first reserved ball number counter 203a of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 53).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation production of the first special symbol regardless of whether it is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to their reception, the sub-th 1 is subtracted (updated) from the value of the 1-reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1305 in FIG. 55). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c. While synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a second special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command sent from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d. It's becoming

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls of the second special symbol variation effect by entering the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the main control device 110 When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is added, the main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command The value after addition of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variation effect reserved by the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (FIG. 52). (see S1211 of ).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 2 corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, and setting the aspect of the variation production of the second special symbol regardless of whether it is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to their reception, the sub-th 1 is subtracted (updated) from the value of the 2-hold ball number counter 223d (see S1314 in FIG. 55). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d. While synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81 in a game state in which variation effects of each special symbol are encouraged. Used. That is, the sound lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 52), special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command, or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command In response to receiving At the timing of updating the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1305 or S1314 in FIG. 55), it corresponds to a special symbol that is encouraged according to the game state. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d after storage or updating, the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number for display A number-of-balls command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first number of the sound lamp control device 113 The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution pattern indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 4(b)). control the rendering of the image as it appears in ).

As described above, the sub first reserved ball counter 223c changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball counter 223d The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the game state is reserved.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is information for performing a variable performance of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the first reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

Voice lamp control device 113, using the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, variation of the first special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the second reserved ball This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the second different symbol transmitted by the number command.

Voice lamp control device 113 uses the value of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223f, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, the variation of the second special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The first execution information storage area 223g is executed at least by the special symbol display device 37, and according to the game state, the information of the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main controller 110 Stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command. It is an area for

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol, the above-described first suspension information storage is performed in order to perform the setting of the variation performance of the first special symbol. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the variable effect stored in the first reservation information storage first area of the area 223e is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g.

The second execution information storage area 223h is executed at least by the special symbol display device 37, and information of the second special symbol variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state, that is, the main controller 110 Stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning and transmitted by the second reserved ball number command. It is an area for

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the second special symbol, the above-described second pending information storage is performed in order to perform the setting of the variation performance of the second special symbol. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the variable effect stored in the second reservation information storage first area of the area 223f is shifted to this second execution information storage area 223h.

The left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i for effect is when the game state of performing the right-handed game is shifted to the game state of performing the left-handed game, that is, the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" or the "normal Determining whether or not the performance hitting instruction executed only once when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the "low probability time shortening state" and the shift to the "normal game state" in which the left hitting game is performed is completed. is a flag for This effect left-handed instruction completion flag 223i is set to ON as an initial value in the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1051 in FIG. 50). By setting in this way, when a left-handed game is started after execution of start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113, for example, at the start of business of the hall, etc., it is possible not to bother to execute the performance hitting instruction. can be done. And, if the game state is not a "normal game state" (that is, "general pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or jackpot state ), and is set to OFF in a state in which the effect hitting right instruction completion flag 223j is not ON (see S1407 in FIG. 56). On the other hand, in the "normal game state", when the effect left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i is not ON (that is, when the effected hitting instruction has not been executed), after setting the effect left-handed instruction command It is set to ON (see S1414 in FIG. 54).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i is set to ON, that is, after shifting from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, the effected hitting instruction is issued even once. If it is being executed (or after execution of the start-up process), it is configured not to execute the effect hitting instruction again. It is possible to limit the performance hitting instruction to be executed after shifting from the game to the left-hand game.

The right-handed instruction execution completion flag 223j for effect is, when the game state in which the left-handed game is performed is shifted to the game state in which the right-handed game is performed, that is, when the jackpot is won in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, Or, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and transitioning to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", a flag for determining whether or not the performance hitting instruction executed only once has been completed. is. This effect hitting right instruction completion flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1052 in FIG. 50). And, if the game state is not a "normal game state" (that is, "general pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or jackpot state ), and in a state in which the effect hitting right instruction execution completion flag 223j is not ON (that is, a state in which the effect hitting method instruction is not implemented), the effect hitting right instruction command is set and then set to ON ( See S1407 in FIG. 56). On the other hand, when the "normal game state" is set and the effect left-handed instruction executed flag 223i is not on, it is set to off (see S1415 in FIG. 56).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect hitting right instruction executed flag 223j is set to ON, that is, after shifting to the right hitting game, the effect hitting instruction is executed even once. In this case, the effect hitting instruction is not executed again, and by referring to the effect right hitting instruction execution completion flag 223j, the effect hitting to be executed after the shift from the left hitting game to the right hitting game is performed. Directions can be limited to one.

Details of the first pending information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g, as well as the second pending information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, the first execution information storing area 223g and the second execution information storing area 223h.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223f has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223e. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, in the first execution information storage area 223g, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. at least provided.

In addition, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. A jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 where is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223h4 where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. at least provided.

Specifically, the first execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. In addition, the second execution information storage area 223h is an area relating to the variation effect of the second special symbol that is currently being executed. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily reserved among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is reserved. and the second area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is reserved the third oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and is the first suspension. The fourth area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that are held.

In addition, the second reservation information storage first area of the second reservation information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation performance of the second special design reserved first in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special design reserved. and the second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the second special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained third in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is retained, and the second retention. The fourth information storage area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that are held.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first pending ball number command from the main controller 110, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set to the first reserve. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the first holding ball number command in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved number of balls command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved at that time is X. , the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in the X-th time among the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved ball X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to the 2 Extracted from the pending pitch command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the third holding ball number command in the corresponding third holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≤ Y ≤ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved at that time is Y. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in Y-th time among the variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved Y area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation Y area of the main controller 110 are stored in the second stop information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 1 variation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the first special symbol from the main controller 110, the first reservation information storage area 223e , to the first execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the first special symbol, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily suspended is started, so the first special symbol that is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the currently executed first special symbol corresponding to the variable performance It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area 223g are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 2 variation pattern command and a special figure 2 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reservation information storage area 223f , to the second execution information storage area 223h. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol currently being executed correspond to the variable performance. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 are stored in the first execution information storage area 223g. Also, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second held ball execution area 203g of the main controller 110 are stored in the second execution information storage area 223h. Furthermore, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 are stored. 4 area, and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, each counter C1~C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and pending in the main control device 110, the first execution information It is stored in the storage area 223g, the second execution information storage area 223h, the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the first to fourth areas storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas storing the second pending information, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223e and the second reservation information storage area 223f, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

It should be noted that the first pending information storage area 223e or second pending information storage area 223f, and the above-described shift processing in the first execution information storage area 223g or second execution information storage area 223h, special figure 1 variation pattern command and special Figure 2 Stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command Number of held balls (special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special Figure 2 Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d before being updated based on the reception of the stop type command), the first reservation information storage first to fourth areas Alternatively, the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second suspended information.

For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e Assume that data is stored in the (first reservation information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the first The data in the third pending information storage area is shifted to the first pending information storing second area, and the data in the first pending information storing fourth area is shifted to the first pending information storing third area.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "2", the first area for storing the first reserved information The data is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4 is stored in an area with an area number smaller by 1 (first execution information storage area). 223g or the second execution information storage area 223h, or the first suspension information storage first to third areas or the second suspension information storage first to third areas). In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 52) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a special pattern fluctuation effect or continuous notice. It controls the performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation mode of the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs for each game state, and the ball shooting mode encouraged for each game state is shown to the player. is configured as Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, the main display right-handed instruction 89 (see FIG. 4) is in a non-display state, and each variation composed of Arabic numerals is displayed. The pattern fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" where right-handed games are encouraged, right-hand hitting instruction 89 for main display becomes a display state, and each variable pattern composed of Chinese numerals fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display mode of the variable symbols in each game state, the player can easily recognize the game state, and at the same time, the game mode (firing mode) necessary for performing the recommended game can be displayed. can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in addition to the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89, a performance hitting instruction (right-hand hitting instruction 81d for presentation; see FIG. 57(d).) A display is made to make it easier for the player to understand which of the left-handed game and the right-handed game should be played, and the start timing thereof. This performance hitting instruction is for performing a hitting method suggestion display only at a specific timing, and executing a right hitting suggestion display at the timing of switching from a left hitting game to a right hitting game, or conversely, from a right hitting game At the timing of switching to a left-handed game, a left-handed suggestion display is executed.

Since the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 and the performance hitting instruction are important display information that suggests the player how to hit, other display contents executed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, each It is configured to be displayed in the forefront with priority over the third symbol in the symbol row, super reach effect, etc.). In addition, as described above, the effect hitting instruction is for displaying the hitting method suggestion only at a specific timing. It is configured to make it easier for players to understand how to hit the ball.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when executing this effect hitting instruction, the current game state, the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol By referring to the execution state of the dynamic display and the type of the special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81, it is configured to determine at which timing the effect hitting instruction is to be executed ( See Figure 56). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the interest of the player is reduced by executing the effect hitting instruction during execution of the special symbol variation effect, or the third symbol display device 81 is used during the left-handed game. It is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the appearance of the suggestion of hitting right for the performance even during the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol to be played.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a variable effect of special symbols to be executed (encouraged) according to the game state is set, and a variable effect of other special symbols (not encouraged) is displayed in the main display area. It is configured not to run in Dm. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged and the ball can enter the first starting port 64, only the variable effect and the pending display of the first special symbol are executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the variable effect and the pending display of the second special symbol are not executed in the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db. In addition, the right-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. ” or “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”, only the second special symbol variation effect and suspension display can be executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the first special symbol variation effect and suspension display are the main display It is configured not to be executed in the area Dm and the cockpit display area Db. With this configuration, the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db, which are the main display areas of the game result, are not encouraged (the game result is difficult to derive because the fluctuation time is long). To improve the interest of a game by providing a comfortable game without making the player feel discomfort (bad impression) due to the execution of the performance.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 28 to 49. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in this embodiment) (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S156 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the increase mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device 504 starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. do. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start up in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The audio ramp control device 113 is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a setting value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 upon receiving the setting value command. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S104 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the start-up mode is the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 in order to start up in the "RAM clear mode".

In the processing of S116, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S116, S117, S171 and S172) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. be. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is pressed during startup processing, RAM initialization processing (S116, S117, S171 and S172) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 conversion processing (S116, S117, S171 and S172).

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117, S171 and S172), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserve "0" clearing of the ball number counter 203a, etc.) are set (S117). Further, the ceiling set completion flag 203q is set to OFF (S171), and the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is cleared to "0" (S172). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), setting change processing is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to FIG. 29, the setting change process (S118) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode". is the processing of

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 is set to start displaying the current probability setting value (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. Display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is started by the setting of starting the display of the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be always fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. That is, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3") or "2" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "3", which is the maximum probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. . Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value " 2", and if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "1", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power cut off. You may do so. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is as high as "3", there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2", the probability setting value must be set almost once while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. FIG. On the other hand, if the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability set value with "2", the probability setting can be performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122). If there is (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), or may be "2", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. , may be "3", which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In the updating of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is between "1" and "2", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is changed to "3". , the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504. FIG.

The loop processing of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability set value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is performed. The process (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 28), the process moves to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117, S171 and S172), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. (clear. In this way, in the process of S124, the hall personnel and the like are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased by having the hall personnel and the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 to fix the probability setting value. can be made

Further, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value is determined by detecting the RAM erase switch 503 being turned on, but the probability setting value may be determined by detecting the setting key 501 being turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach their maximum values ("9999" and "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S153) by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process described later, and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 is performed, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of normal symbols. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal figure per counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, random can be sexualized.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. , the NMI interrupt process described later in FIG. 49 has been executed, so the power-off process from S154 onward is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S101). By setting to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 30), commands or signals to be sent to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processing. , when a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and the pachinko machine 10 are connected) A signal is output to an external output terminal plate (not shown), etc.). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission are transmitted to sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices), and the signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of winning each special symbol is executed ( S203). This winning process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After S203, next, normal electric power control processing for executing drive control processing for the normal electric power 72 is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. ◯” symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electrode 72 is opened for a predetermined period of time. remains closed. This ordinary electric role control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Then, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern per counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (first embodiment Then, when they reach "9999", "99", "99", "9", and "99") respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the general figure per counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal pattern per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, the starting winning process associated with winning the first starting opening 64, the upper second starting opening 71, or the lower second starting opening 71a is executed (S208). The details of the starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passage processing (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203i (see FIG. 6), and the reserved number of variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol reserved lamp 84, for example. Details of this gate passage processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the gate passing process (S209), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208) A special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), normal design determination is performed, and normal design variable display based on the determination result is performed in the normal design display device 83. A figure change process is executed (S211). In this normal pattern variation process (S211), the normal pattern hit probability is performed at either a high probability (for example, 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) according to the game state described above. Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed based on the result of success or failure, and the display result corresponding to the result of success or failure is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 . In addition, the detail of normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is mentioned later with reference to FIG.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), the firing control processing is executed (S212), and further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is executed periodically to perform processing, and in the main processing, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). . For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing to read processing (S202), winning processing (S203), normal electric role control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205). ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S208).

In the starting winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not the ball enters the first starting hole 64, the upper second starting hole 71, or the lower second starting hole 71a. A process of storing (reserving) the values of C3 and CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the starting opening 64, 71, 71a that has won is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the first starting port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) of the ball into the first starting port 64, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 31), A ball entering the 1 starting port 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

As a result of the determination in S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first start hole 64 (there has been a start win) (S301: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, It is determined whether or not the game state encourages left-handed games (S302). As a result of the determination, if it is not in the "normal game state" (S302: No), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) left-handed game instead of the recommended right-handed game is thrown into the first start port 64. Since it means that a prize has been won, an alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5), and a left-handed hitting instruction such as "please hit right" is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Error processing is executed (S303), and the process proceeds to S305.

By configuring in this way, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" where the left-handed game is not encouraged 1 When a ball is detected by a starting port switch (not shown), error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, and the player is prompted to execute a left-handed game in a game state in which left-handed games are not encouraged. It is possible to shy away (promote right-handed games), eliminate games in a game mode different from the recommended game specifications as much as possible, and realize the game characteristics assumed in each game state.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the game state is the "normal game state" (S302: Yes), the game state encourages left-handed games, so the process of S303 is skipped and S303 is skipped. The process proceeds to S305 without performing left-handed error processing.

As a result of the processing of S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (main controller 110 (S305) determines whether or not the number N1 of active balls (N1) of dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that is reserved is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S305) . Then, even if there is a prize to the first starting port 64, if the number of balls to be activated is not N1<4 (S305: No), this starting prize processing (S208) is terminated, and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S305: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S306). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S307), and processing is performed. to S312.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting hole 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the upper second starting hole 71 (start winning). (S304). Here, as with the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the upper second starting port 71 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 31) 3), the ball entering the upper second starting port 71 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the ball has won the upper second starting hole 71 (there has been a starting prize) (S304: Yes), the process proceeds to S309.

In addition, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the ball has entered the upper second start hole 71 (S304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is the "normal game state". If it is determined to be in the "game state", it is a game state in which a left-handed game is encouraged.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the ball has not won the upper second starting hole 71 (S304: No), then whether or not the ball has won the lower second starting hole 71a (start winning) is determined (S308). Here, similarly to the first start opening 64 and the upper second start opening 71, the entry (winning) to the lower second start opening 71a read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 31) is detected. Based on the output signal of the side second starting port switch (not shown), the ball entering the lower second starting port 71a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (there has been a starting prize) (S304: Yes or S308: Yes), then the second reserved ball number counter 203b value (the number N2 of operation pending balls of dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol suspended in the main controller 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment) or not (S309). Then, whether there is a prize to the upper second start opening 71 and the lower second start opening 71a (S304: No and S308: No), or to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a Even if there is a prize, if the number N2 of operation pending balls is not less than 4 (S309: No), this starting prize winning process (S208) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of operation pending balls is less than 4 (S309: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (number of operation pending balls N2) (S310). And this time, since it is a winning prize in the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the random values C1 to C3 and CS1. It is set as the first (S311), and the process proceeds to S312.

Also, in the processing of S301 and S304, when the ball enters the first starting port 64 and the upper second starting port 71 at the same time, or in the processing of S301 and S308, the first starting port 64 and the lower second starting port 71a When the ball wins at the same time, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the winning processing of the ball to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is waited. , in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the winning process of the ball to the waiting upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a is executed. You may

In the process of S312, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. That is, among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S307, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a The random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 are reserved (stored) (S312).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S307 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S306 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Also, among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e set as the storage destination in S311, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b The random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 are reserved (stored) respectively (S312).

Specifically, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S311 based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the processing of S310 If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S306 (operational reserved ball number N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the process of S307, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S313). In addition, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the process of S310 (number of activated ball N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the process of S311, and the jackpot In order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is stored in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S313). As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. . When the process of S313 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command in the process of S313 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S312. However, it is also possible to use the read value stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the process of S312.

Next, the gate passing process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this gate passage processing (S209). In the gate passage processing (S209), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball), and if the ball has passed through (entered the ball), the value of the normal game per counter C4 is stored in the normal game reserved ball. A process of storing (holding) in the area 203i is executed.

In this gate passage processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage of the ball into the through gate 67 (see S205 in FIG. 31) read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 31), (ball entry) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 31).

In the processing of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passage processing (S209) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is returned to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball) (S401: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, the shooting of the left-handed game ball is encouraged. It is determined whether or not the player is in a game state (S402). As a result of the determination, if it is "normal game state" (S402: Yes), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) right-handed game instead of the encouraged left-handed game has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, a warning sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5), and the third symbol display device 81 executes a performance hitting instruction such as "Return to left hitting". A hitting error process is executed (S403), and the process proceeds to S404.

By configuring in this way, when a ball is detected at the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" in which the right-handed game is not recommended, by performing error processing such as outputting an alarm sound, the right-handed game is performed. To make a player avoid playing a right-handed game in a game state in which the game is not encouraged, to eliminate as much as possible the game in a game form different from the game specifications to be encouraged, and to realize the game characteristics assumed in each game state. can do.

It should be noted that, in the process of S402, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (S402: No), the "probability change state", the "general pattern high probability time reduction state", and the "latency probability Since it is a variable state or a "low probability time shortening state", the normal right hitting error process of S403 is not performed, the process of S403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S404.

In the process of S404, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (normal pattern variable display operation reserved ball number HN reserved in the main control device 110) is the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S404). Then, even if there is a ball passing through the through gate 67 (entering the ball), if the number of balls HN < 4 (S404: No), the gate passing process (S209) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 31).

On the other hand, if the number of pending balls in operation HN<4 (S404: Yes), the value of the number of pending balls in normal pattern 203h (the number of pending balls in operation HN) is incremented by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5), and the read data is stored in the normal pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203i. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after addition by the process of S405 is "1", the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reservation first area. In addition, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after the addition is "2", the normal pattern reserved second area, and if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after the addition is "3", the normal pattern If the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after addition is "4" in the reserved third area, the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reserved fourth area. After the process of S406 ends, this gate passage process (S209) ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

In addition, in the first embodiment, it is configured not to transmit the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol to the sound lamp control device 113, but the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 and perform an effect (announcement) regarding a reserved symbol or the like relating to variable display of normal symbols. In this case, by transmitting the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 in the normal pattern pending ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute the so-called pre-reading process regarding the normal pattern, and the production of the normal pattern. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special symbol variation process (S210) includes dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, and control of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

The MPU 201, in this special figure variation process (S210), firstly, determines whether or not one of the first special figure and the second special figure is in the jackpot at the moment (S501). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, during the jackpot opening), During a predetermined period of time after the jackpot game ends (that is, jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S501, if one of the special symbols is in the jackpot (S501: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is returned to.

In the processing of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), next, it is determined whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the midst of a small hit at present. (S551). During the small hit, during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit, and a predetermined time before the start of the small hit game (that is, the opening of the small hit) and during a predetermined time after the end of the small winning game (that is, the ending of the small winning). As a result of the determination in S551, if any special symbol is in the middle of a small hit (S551: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is returned to.

In the processing of S551, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (S551: No), next, the special symbol display device 37 checks whether the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed dynamically. If it is discriminated (S502) and the first special symbol is dynamically displayed in the special symbol display device 37 (S502: Yes), the setting process regarding the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed, so S503 and S504 Skip the process and proceed to S505.

In the process of S502, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S502: No), then, after the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is stopped, a predetermined It is determined whether or not time has passed (S503). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S503: No), the process proceeds to S505. As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device 81 in the case of the "normal game state") only for a predetermined time, so that the game is played. The player can be made to visually recognize the stop pattern.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S503, if a predetermined time has passed after the stop of the dynamic display (S503: Yes), whether or not to perform the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the motion of the first special symbol Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing target display is performed (S504), and then the processing proceeds to S505.

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504) which is one process of the special figure fluctuation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504).

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504), as described above, whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed, and the setting of the dynamic display in the case of performing the dynamic display of the first special symbol processing, etc.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504), first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (dynamic display (variation effect) operation reserved ball number related to the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110 N1) is greater than "0" (S5001). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not greater than "0" (S5001: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed. The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S504) is terminated, and returns to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34).

In addition, in the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5001: No), a third symbol is displayed according to the game state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. This demonstration effect is a game state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, in the "normal game state", the variation effect (dynamic display) of the first special symbol to be executed. Executed if does not exist.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", when there is no reserved number of balls of the first special symbol to be executed, the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, and the first The period until it is judged that the value of the number of held balls counter 203a (the number of held balls in operation N1) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the sound lamp control device in the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

In addition, when neither the dynamic display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, a predetermined standby screen is displayed, and when the player holds the operation handle 51 (for example, the first game situation ), the demonstration effect (for example, the first effect) is executed from the standby screen. Then, during the execution of the demonstration effect, when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (for example, the second game situation), the first special It may be configured to be executed by switching to a variable effect (for example, second effect) corresponding to the dynamic display of the symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, when each variable performance is executed from the display contents of the demonstration performance, the player can easily understand that the demonstration performance is terminated and the variable performance is started immediately after the variable performance is started. , an effect different from the display contents of the demonstration effect (for example, a cut-in effect, etc.; a third effect) is executed so that the player can clearly understand that the demonstration effect has ended (that the variable effect has started). can be configured to In this variable performance, it is determined whether or not a big win pattern that shifts from a non-big win state to a big win state appears.

In the process of S5001, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is a value greater than "0" (S5001: Yes), dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol It is determined that it is time to start execution, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S5002). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the processing described later, so that the reserved ball related to the first special symbol This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S5003). This data shift process (S5003) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the first reserved ball execution area 203f. , 1st reservation 1st area → 1st reservation ball execution area 203f, 1st reservation 2nd area → 1st reservation 1st area, 1st reservation 3rd area → 1st reservation 2nd area, 1st reservation 4th area →The data in each area is shifted, such as the first reserved third area.

After the data shift process of S5003, based on the values of various counters stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process, the special symbol display device 37 (if the "normal game state", the third symbol display In order to perform the setting process of the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed in the device 81), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 is turned on. (S5004). As a result of determination, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is not turned on (S5004: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal high probability time shortening state" or "normal low probability time shortening state" , and since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is turned on (S5004: Yes), the gaming state is "probability variable state" or "latent probability variable state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007.

In the processing of S5007, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol is being executed (S5007). As a result of the determination, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not being executed (S5007: No), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the A jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is won based on the set jackpot random number table 202a is performed (S5008).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"). In this case, in the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 32/10000 when the set value is "1" and 36/10000 when the set value is "3". In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. ” is 221/10000, and the set value “3” is 225/10000.

In the process of S5008, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, , is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing of S5008, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5008: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol (see FIG. 8(a)) and the first reserved ball execution area Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203f, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5009).

In this process, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and after the jackpot, the "time reduction function" is given until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. There is a jackpot type "time saving A" or a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time saving function" will also be granted until the next jackpot. The jackpot type "Probability A" that transitions to "state" or the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time saving function" is not given "latency It is determined whether the jackpot type "probability A" that shifts to "probability fluctuation state" or the jackpot type. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8(a)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5010). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big win, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from among the selected performance modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big win, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5016.

On the other hand, in the process of S5007, if it is determined that the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol is being executed (S5007: Yes), or if it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S5008 (S5008 : No), a small winning lottery to determine whether or not it is a small winning based on the value of the big winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the big winning random number table 202a set in S5005 or S5006. Processing is performed (S5011).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a small hit is determined by referring to the big hit random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the big hit random number counter stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. It is determined based on the value of C1. As described above, regardless of the game state (mode) and set values that the pachinko machine 10 can take, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random value is defined so that the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 5000/10000. It is

In the process of S5011, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the big hit random number table 202a, and if they match. , it is determined to be a small hit. As a result of the processing of S5011, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S5011: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5012). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since only one type of small winning type is provided, the display mode is set without referring to the small winning type table or the like.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5013). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f A dynamic time (fluctuation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from among the selected performance modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small hit.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for small hits, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Also, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5016.

On the other hand, as a result of the small winning lottery process of S5011, when it is determined that it is not a small winning (S5011: No), the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of losing is set. Therefore, the process proceeds to S5014. In the process of S5014, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved ball are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203a and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special Set one of the "reach" production modes (S5014). In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5015), and the process proceeds to S5016. In the process of S5015, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5014, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first held ball execution area 203f Select the variation pattern associated with Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small win, and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are performed by the same random number value C3, By judging and determining with the same judging program using CS1, the program can be shared and the number of development man-hours can be reduced during development.

Next, in the process of S5016, based on the variation time according to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined by the process of S5010, S5013 or S5015, the variation pattern via the sound lamp control device 113 Set the special figure 1 variation pattern command to notify the corresponding variation time to the display control device 114 (S5016). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is "variable probability A", and further, if the "25 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is selected, the jackpot / "variable probability A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if you lose the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery, and if the "25 seconds" "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected, the special figure 1 showing the "25 seconds" "super reach" is lost. A variation pattern command is set.

After the processing of S5016, the stop type set in the processing of S5009, S5012 or S5014 is set to the special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. (S5017), this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S504) ends, returns to special figure fluctuation processing (figure 34 reference).

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the special figure 1 stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) is based on the propriety of the first special symbol By grasping the stop type of the dynamic display, it is possible to determine the stop result of the variable presentation in detail based on the information.

These special figure 1 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 1 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 31 ), these commands are sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, it generates a special figure 1 variation pattern command for display and a special figure 1 type command for display according to the game state based on it. and transmits it to the display control device 114 .

In this way, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol that results in a big win is being executed, the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a small win or a loss, so that two special symbols are displayed. It is possible to prevent each jackpot result from being derived in the dynamic display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in one of the second special symbols or the first special symbols is being executed, the dynamic display of the other first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The result of the display is configured to be a small win or a loss, but it may be configured so that the other dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can also be a big win.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description is continued. In the process of S505, the special symbol display device 37 determines whether or not the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is being dynamically displayed (S505), and the special symbol display device 37 displays the second special symbol dynamically. If it is being displayed (S505: Yes), since the setting process regarding the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed, the process of S506 and S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S508.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S505: No), then, after the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is stopped , it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S506). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the stop of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S506: No), the process proceeds to S508. As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (“probability variation state”, “normal pattern high probability time reduction state”, “latency probability variation state”) for a predetermined time. Or, if it is a "normal pattern low probability time shortened state", it is displayed on the third pattern display device 81), so that the player can visually recognize the stop pattern.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S506, if a predetermined time has passed after the stop of the dynamic display (S506: Yes), whether or not to perform the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the motion of the second special symbol Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing target display is performed (S507), and then the processing proceeds to S508.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S507), which is one process of the special figure fluctuation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. Figure 36 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S507).

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S507), as described above, whether or not to perform dynamic display of the second special symbol, setting of the dynamic display in the case of performing dynamic display of the second special symbol processing, etc.

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S507), first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol reserved in the main controller 110 N2) is greater than "0" (S5301). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not greater than "0" (S5301: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed. The special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S507) is terminated, and returns to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34).

In addition, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5301: No), a third symbol is displayed according to the game state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. This demonstration effect is a game state in which the second special symbol variation effect can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, "probability variation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and "latency probability variation state". Or, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", it is executed when there is no second special symbol variation effect (dynamic display) to be executed.

Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state", the number of pending balls of the second special symbol to be executed does not exist, the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, and the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N2) is determined to be greater than "0". The period up to is determined to be during the demonstration.

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the sound lamp control device in the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display demo command. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the demonstration effect for the variation effect of the second special symbol.

In the process of S5301, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is a value greater than "0" (S5301: Yes), the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol It is determined that it is time to start the execution, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S5302). This is because execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol is started by the processing to be described later. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S5303). This data shift process (S5303) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the second reserved ball execution area 203g. , Second reservation first area → second reservation ball execution area 203g, second reservation second area → second reservation first area, second reservation third area → second reservation second area, second reservation fourth area →The data in each area is shifted, such as 2nd reserved 3rd area.

After the data shift process of S5303, based on the values of various counters stored in the second holding ball execution area 203g by the data shift process, the special symbol display device 37 ("probability fluctuation state", "general figure high probability time In order to set the dynamic display of the second special symbol executed in the third symbol display device 81) if it is a shortened state, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortened state", first , In order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S5304). As a result of determination, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is not turned on (S5304: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" , and since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5307. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is turned on (S5304: Yes), the game state is "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5306), and the process proceeds to S5307.

In the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is being executed (S5307). As a result of the determination, when the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is not being executed (S5307: No), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and in S5305 or S5306 A jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is made based on the set jackpot random number table 202a is performed (S5308).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"). In this case, in the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 32/10000 when the set value is "1" and 36/10000 when the set value is "3". In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. ” is 221/10000, and the set value “3” is 225/10000.

In the process of S5308, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, , is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S5308, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5308: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol (see FIG. 8(b)) and the second reserved ball execution area Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203g, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5309).

In this process, the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. That is, the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and after the jackpot, the "time reduction function" is given until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. The jackpot type "time saving A" or the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "latency probability change state" in which the "time saving function" is not given. The jackpot type is discriminated as to whether the jackpot type to be transferred is “probability A” or not. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 8(b)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5310). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big win, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g, and the and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from among the selected performance modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big win, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5316.

On the other hand, in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is being executed (S5307: Yes), or if it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S5308 ( S5308: No), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding ball execution area 203g, small hit to determine whether or not a small hit based on the big hit random number table 202a set in S5305 or S5306 Lottery processing is performed (S5311).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a small hit is determined by referring to the big hit random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the big hit random number counter stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. It is determined based on the value of C1. As described above, regardless of the game state (mode) and set values that the pachinko machine 10 can take, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the small hit random value is defined so that the small win probability of the second special symbol is 7500/10000. It is

In the process of S5311, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the big hit random number table 202a, and if they match. , it is determined to be a small hit. As a result of the process of S5311, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5312). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since only one type of small winning type is provided, the display mode is set without referring to the small winning type table or the like.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5313). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g A dynamic time (fluctuation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from among the selected performance modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 to 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small hit.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for small hits, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Also, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5316.

On the other hand, as a result of the small winning lottery process of S5311, when it is determined that it is not a small winning (S5311: No), the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of losing is set. (S5314). In the process of S5314, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second retained ball execution area 203g and the second retained ball are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203b and the current game state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special Set one of the "reach" production modes. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5316. In the process of S5315, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5314, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second held ball execution area 203g Select the variation pattern associated with Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small win, and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are performed by the same random number value C3, By judging and determining with the same judging program using CS1, the program can be shared and the number of development man-hours can be reduced during development. Further, by determining and determining the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the same determination program, the program can be shared, and the development man-hours can be reduced at the time of development.

Next, in the process of S5316, based on the variation time according to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined by the process of S5310, S5313 or S5315, the variation pattern via the sound lamp control device 113 Set the special figure 2 variation pattern command to notify the corresponding variation time to the display control device 114 (S5316). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is a jackpot type "probability variable A", and a "25 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is selected, the jackpot ・A special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "probability variation A" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if you lose the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery, and if the ``25 seconds'' ``super reach'' fluctuation pattern is selected, the special figure 2 showing the lost ``25 seconds'' ``super reach'' A variation pattern command is set.

Then, after the processing of S5316, the stop type set in the processing of S5309, S5312 or S5314, set the special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 (S5317), this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S507) ends, returns to special figure fluctuation processing (figure 34 reference).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the special figure 2 stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) is based on the propriety of the second special symbol By grasping the stop type of the dynamic display, it is possible to determine the stop result of the variable presentation in detail based on the information.

These special figure 2 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 2 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 31 ), these commands are sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, it is based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command for display, the special figure 2 type command for display, and the special figure 2 type command for display and for display A special figure 2 effect command is generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 .

Returning to FIG. 34, the description is continued. In the process of S508, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol being executed has passed, and whether or not the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol being executed has passed. Then, according to the determination result, the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped (S508), and the special symbol variation process (S210) is terminated, Return to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the variation stop processing (S508), which is one processing of the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation stopping process (S508).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S508), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display fluctuation time of each special symbol has passed. While displaying on the pattern display device 37 , each determination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, when one of the first special symbols for which the variation time has passed is a dynamic display that becomes a big hit or a small hit, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol is also being executed in parallel, or the variation time One of the second special symbols that has passed is a dynamic display that becomes a jackpot, and when the dynamic display of the other first special symbol is also being executed in parallel, the other second special symbol or the first A process of stopping the dynamic display of the special symbol as a failure is performed. Furthermore, in the case of "ordinary figure low probability time reduction state" or "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state", according to the counting result of the number of times of dynamic display of the special symbol Time saving end condition of "time saving function" is established or not, and if the time reduction end condition of the "time reduction function" is established, the processing of switching the "time reduction function" from valid to invalid is performed. Also, if the special pattern is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern has reached the ceiling. Perform transition processing to "low probability time reduction state".

In the fluctuation stop processing (S508), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501). As a result of determination, when it is determined that dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501: No), the process proceeds to S5506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S5501: Yes), the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation time) has passed (S5502). The display time during the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 etc. (Determined according to the special figure 1 variation pattern command ), if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not passed (S5502: No), the display of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated ( S5505), end this fluctuation stop processing (S508), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 lights in a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is started. Alternatively, a display mode of turning off is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S5502: Yes), special symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped for the upper LED group 37b1 of the device 37 (S5503). The stop design is preset by the process of S5009, S5012 or S5014 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 35).

In the first embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, The upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the big win, and when the judgment result is a small win, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the small win. lights up.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set in the process of S5503, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to display the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37 and to perform the confirmation display, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5511. The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this special figure 1 confirmation command, if the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the game state is "normal game state", or , In the "normal game state", while the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the ceiling is reached by the variation performance of the second special symbol, and the "general figure low probability time shortening state" is reached. If transferred), to the display control device 114 to transmit a special figure 1 confirmation command for display. The display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command, stops the variation effect of the third figure corresponding to the first special figure in the third figure display device 81, and confirms and displays the stop figure. is configured as In addition, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is not executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 displays even if it receives the special figure 1 confirmation command. It is configured not to transmit the display special figure 1 confirmation command to the control device 114 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed, and reduce the processing load.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 in the process of S5501 (S5501: No), then the special symbol display device 37 It is determined whether or not dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed in the lower LED group 37b2 (S5506). As a result of determination, when it is determined that dynamic display of the second special symbol is not executed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5506: No), this fluctuation stop process (S508) is terminated. Then, it returns to the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S5506: Yes), the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation time) has passed (S5507). The display time during the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 etc. (Determined according to the special figure 2 variation pattern command If the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not passed (S5507: No), the display of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated. (S5510), end this fluctuation stop processing (S508), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the lower LED group 37b2 lights in a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the second special symbol is started. Alternatively, a display mode of turning off is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5507, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S5507: Yes), special symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped for the lower LED group 37b2 of the device 37 (S5508). The stop design is preset by the process of S5309, S5312 or S5314 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 36).

In the first embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, only the leftmost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, The lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the big win, and when the judgment result is a small win, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the small win. lights up.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set in the process of S5508, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to display the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37 and to display the confirmation, set the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5509), and the process proceeds to S5511. The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this special figure 2 confirmation command, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the game state is "normal figure high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "hidden probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state", or "general pattern high probability time reduction state", the second special pattern is displayed in the third pattern. In the state executed by the device 81, the time saving end condition is established by the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol, and when it shifts to the "normal game state"), the display special figure 2 confirmation command for the display control device 114 to send. The display control device 114 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command for display, stops the variation production of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stop symbol. is configured as It should be noted that, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114 for display special FIG. 2 is configured not to transmit the confirmation command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed, and reduce the processing load.

Here, the other stop process (S5511), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 37) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the other stop processing (S5511).

In this other stop processing (S5511), one of the first special symbols for which the fluctuation time has passed is a dynamic display that becomes a big hit or a small hit, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol is also being executed in parallel. In the case of, or when the dynamic display of one of the second special symbols after the passage of the fluctuation time is a big hit, and the dynamic display of the other first special symbol is also being executed in parallel, the other A process of stopping the dynamic display of the second special symbol or the first special symbol as a failure is performed.

In this other stop process (S5511), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (whether or not the dynamic display fluctuation time has elapsed) (S5601). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (the fluctuation time of the dynamic display has passed) (S5601: Yes), then the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. (S5602). As a result of determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5602: Yes), furthermore, whether the dynamic display of the first special symbol after the fluctuation time has passed has won the jackpot or the small hit is determined (S5603). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the jackpot or the small hit (S5603: Yes), the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed should be stopped as a lost symbol. , to the lower LED group 37b2, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the missing symbol (S5604), the other stop process (S5511) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (FIG. 37 reference), and the process proceeds to S5512.

By configuring in this way, the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in the "normal game state" can be stopped as a losing symbol by the dynamic display of the first special symbol as a big win or a small win. can. As a result, a right-handed game that is not recommended in the "normal game state" is performed, the upper second start port 71 is made to win, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed, and a small win is won. It is possible to prevent an unexpected prize ball in terms of game specifications, such as winning a prize ball in the variable prize winning device 65 in an open state.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not being executed (S5602: No), the processing of S5603 and S5604 is skipped, and the other stop processing (S5511) ends. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 37), and the process proceeds to S5512. Also, in the processing of S5603, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not won the big hit and the small hit (S5603: No), the processing of S5604 is also skipped in this case, and the other side is stopped. The process (S5511) is terminated, the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 37), and the process proceeds to S5512.

In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not stopped (S5601: No), that is, the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (dynamic display fluctuation If it is determined that the time has passed), then it is determined whether or not dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5605). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins the jackpot (S5606). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has won the jackpot (S5606: Yes), the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is stopped as a losing symbol, the upper LED For the group 37b1, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the missing symbol (S5607), the other stop processing (S5511) is ended, and the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 37) is started. Return, and the process proceeds to S5512.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5605, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not being executed (S5605: No), the processing of S5606 and S5607 is skipped, and the other stop processing (S5511) ends. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 37), and the process proceeds to S5512. Also, in the process of S5606, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not won the jackpot (S5606: No), the process of S5607 is also skipped in this case, and the other stop process (S5511 ), return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 37), and proceed to S5512.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description is continued. In the process of S5512, it is determined whether or not the game state is the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" or the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (S5512). As a result of the determination, if it is not "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (S5512: No), it is not a gaming state in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, so the process of S5513 is skipped. to the processing of S5514. On the other hand, in the processing of S5512, if it is determined that the game state is "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" (S5512: Yes), "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" Or because the special symbol has stopped dynamic display in the "general figure high probability time reduction state", the time saving counting process for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the stop of the special symbol Execute the time saving counting process (S5513), and then the process proceeds to S5514.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving counting process (S5513), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 37) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this time saving counting process (S5513).

In this time-saving counting process (S5513), it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition of the "time-saving function" is satisfied according to the counting result of the dynamic display of the special symbol, and the time-saving end condition of the "time-saving function" is determined. is established, the process of switching the "time saving function" from valid to invalid is performed.

In this time-saving counting process (S5513), first, the value of the time-saving counter 203o is subtracted by 1 (S5701), and then the value of the subtracted time-saving counter 203o is determined to be a value greater than "0" ( S5702). As a result of determination, if the value of the time saving counter 203o subtracted in the process of S5701 is not a value greater than "0", that is, if the value of the time saving counter 203o is "0" or less (S5702: No), time saving end conditions is established, then it is determined whether or not the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is turned on (S5703), and if the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is turned on (S5703: Yes), the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is set to OFF (S5704), this time saving counting process (S5513) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 37).

Also, when it is determined that the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is not turned on in the processing of S5703 (S5703: No), it is determined that the time saving low accuracy flag 203n is turned on, and the time saving low accuracy flag 203n is turned off. Set (S5705), terminate this time saving counting process (S5513), and return to the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 37).

In the process of S5702, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203o subtracted in the process of S5701 is greater than "0" (S5702: Yes), since the time saving end condition is not satisfied, S5703 to The process of S5705 is skipped, this time-saving counting process (S5513) is completed, and it returns to a fluctuation|variation stop process (refer FIG. 37).

Returning to FIG. 37, the description is continued. In the processing of S5514, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S5514). As a result of determination, when the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S5514: Yes), it is a high probability state of special symbols, and since it is a game state that cannot reach the ceiling, the process of S5515 is skipped and this fluctuation stop The process (S508) is terminated and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 34). On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203k is not turned on (S5514: No), it is a low probability state of special symbols, and since it is a game state in which it is possible to reach the ceiling, the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols is the number of times of reaching the ceiling. Determines whether or not it has reached, and executes the ceiling reaching counting process (S5515) in order to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" according to the determination result (S5515), and ends this fluctuation stop processing (S508), Return to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 34).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the ceiling reaching counting process (S5515), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 37) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reach counting process (S5515).

In this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515), the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result reaches the ceiling reaching number. Set the number of times of time reduction based on the transition to "probable time reduction state".

In this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515), first, 1 is added to the value of the ceiling reaching counting counter 203p (S5801). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the added value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is smaller than "900" (S5802).

As a result of the determination in S5802, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p added in the processing of S5801 is smaller than "900" (S5802: Yes), the processing of S5803 to S5806 is skipped, and this ceiling reaching count processing (S5515 ) and return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5802, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p added in the processing of S5801 is not less than "900", that is, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is greater than or equal to "900" (S5802: No), because the ceiling has been reached, it is then determined whether or not the ceiling setting completion flag 203q is turned on (S5803). As a result of the determination, if the ceiling set flag 203q is not turned on (S5803: No), since the special symbol has not yet shifted to the "low probability time shortening state" after the special symbol has become a low probability state. , In order to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", first set the value of the time saving counter 203o to "1140" (S5804), to indicate that it has transitioned to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" The ceiling set flag 203q is set to ON (S5805). Then, in order to shift the game state to the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", the time reduction low probability flag 203n is set to ON (S5806), this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (See FIG. 37). As a result, it is possible to generate the "ordinary map low probability time shortening state" based on the number of times of reaching the ceiling.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S5803, if the ceiling setting completed flag 203q is turned on (S5803: Yes), since it has already transitioned once to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the processing of S5804 to S5806 is skipped Then, this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 37).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S203).

This winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) according to the type of the jackpot when a jackpot of each special symbol occurs, and set the opening time of Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game), a jackpot opening/closing control process (S608) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the jackpot setting the end of the jackpot state at the timing when the jackpot state ends. End processing (S610) is executed.

In addition, in this winning process (S203), when a small winning of each special symbol occurs, the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened (the number of rounds) is set according to the small winning, and the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set. set. Then, in the case of the small winning state (game), a small winning opening/closing control process (S616) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the small winning state ends at the timing when the small winning state ends. A small hit end process (S618) that sets is executed.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in any dynamic display of special symbols (S601). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S601: Yes), in order to perform the jackpot game, first, in order to invalidate the "variable probability function", the "time saving function" and the "ceiling function" during the jackpot game, The probability variable flag 203k, the time saving high probability flag 203m, the time saving low probability flag 203n and the ceiling set flag 203q are set to off (S602), and the values of the time saving counter 203o and the ceiling reaching count counter 203p are cleared to "0" ( S603). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S604). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S604). An opening time (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S606), and the process proceeds to S611. Thereby, the jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

The round counter described above is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the jackpot game, and the round Decrease the value of the counter by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot in progress is terminated.

In the process of S601, if it is determined that the big win is not won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S601: No), then the small win is won in the dynamic display of any special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S607). As a result of the determination, if a small hit is won (S607: Yes), a winning opening to be opened (that is, the variable winning device 65) is set to perform a small win game, and a small win type (for a small win The number of openings of the variable winning device 65 corresponding to the type of special symbol that has been won is set in an opening counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S608).

Then, in order to transmit a small winning opening command indicating the start of a small winning to the sound lamp control device 113, the small winning opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S609), Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, "0.5 seconds") is set (S610), and the process proceeds to S611. Thereby, a small winning opening command is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

It should be noted that the above-described open counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the open counter, and when the value is set in the open counter (that is, "1" or more), while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the small winning game, Decrease the value of the open counter by 1. Then, when the value of the open counter becomes "0", the small prize being executed is terminated.

Next, in the process of S611, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S611). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S611: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S612).

Here, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set in the winning process (S203).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), first, the opening time set in S605 of the winning process (S203), or the opening time set in S6020 (see FIG. 43) of the big winning opening opening process (S6007) described later. It is determined whether or not the interval time has passed (S6001). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has not passed (S6001: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so that the variable winning device 65 is kept closed. Skip the process and proceed to S6006.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has passed (S6001: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6002). , a winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S6003). Then, the maximum opening time ("30 seconds" in the first embodiment) of the variable winning device 65 at the time of the big win is set (S6004), and a big winning mouth opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is issued. It is generated and set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6005), and the process proceeds to S6006. The sound lamp control device 113 that has received the command to open the big winning opening executes the information that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and informs the player that the variable winning device 65 has been opened. It is configured to prompt the player to win the ball to the variable winning device 65 which is open to the player.

In the process of S6006, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open and is during the opening time or the interval time, so the processing of S6007 is skipped and this The jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) is ended, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, in the process of S6006, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006: Yes), in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 that is open, processing during the opening of the big winning opening is performed. Perform (S6007), end the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), and return to the winning process (see FIG. 41).

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the process (S6007) during the opening of the big winning opening, which is one process of the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007).

In this process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007), the process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this big winning opening opening process (S6007), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6004 of the big winning opening/closing control process (S612) has passed (S6011). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 has passed (S6011: Yes), the condition for closing the variable prize winning device 65 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the variable prize winning device 65 in the round. In order to clear the counter value to "0" (S6012) and close the variable winning device 65, the process proceeds to S6016. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6016 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6011, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S6011: No), then whether or not the big winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, whether the ball enters the variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6013).

In the process of S6013, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6013: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6014), then the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6015). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6015: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and variable winning is achieved. Since the conditions for closing the device 65 are satisfied, the process proceeds to S6016 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the process of S6015, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter is greater than "0" (S6015: Yes), the conditions for closing the variable prize winning device 65 are not established, and the variable prize winning device 65 is opened. , the processing of S6016 to S6020 is skipped, and the processing during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) ends. After the process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is completed, the process returns to the big win opening/closing control process (see FIG. 42).

Next, in the process of closing the variable winning device 65 from S6016, first, the variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S6016), and then the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the variable winning device 65 has been closed. A large winning opening closing command is set (S6017), and the process proceeds to S6018. The command for closing the big winning opening set in the process of S6017 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 31). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S6018, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter (S6018), and then whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019: Yes), the number of rounds (remaining number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened) remains, so the next variable winning device 65 is opened (for example, "1 second") is set (S6020), the process during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 42).

On the other hand, in the process of S6019, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S6019: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, the interval time is not set (that is, S6020 is skipped) in order to end the jackpot state, and the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is finished, and the jackpot opening/closing control is performed. Return to the process (see FIG. 42).

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 41, the description is continued. After the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 42) of S612 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613). As a result of determination, if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613: Yes), in order to continue the big win state, the process of S614, which is the big win end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203) exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S613, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S613: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening operations have been completed, a jackpot ending process is performed to end the jackpot state (S614), and the winning process (S203) is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the jackpot ending process (S614), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S610).

In this jackpot end processing (S614), the probability variable flag 203k, the time-saving high-probability flag 203m and the time-saving counter 203o are set based on the winning jackpot type.

In this jackpot end processing (S614), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A" (S6101). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A" (S6101: Yes), the probability variation flag 203k is turned on in order to make the gaming state after the jackpot end "probability variation state" (S6102) Then, the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is turned on (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the processing of S6101, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot type "Probability A" (S6101: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is the jackpot type "Probability A". Determined (S6104), if the jackpot type of this time is the jackpot type "probability A" (S6104: Yes), the variable probability flag 203k is turned on (S6105), and the process proceeds to S6108.

On the other hand, in the process of S6104, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot type "probability A" (S6104: No), it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the time saving high The sure flag 203m is turned on (S6106), "100" is set to the time saving counter 203o (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the processing of S6108, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6108). The ending command set in the process of S6108 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the ending effect of a big win.

After the end of the process of S6108, an ending time (for example, "10 seconds") is set according to the gaming state (S6109), and a jackpot end setting process for executing various processes at the end of the jackpot is performed (S6110). , ends the jackpot end processing (S614) and returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 41).

Returning to FIG. 41, the description is continued. In the process of S611, if the jackpot is not in progress (S611: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is not during the small winning (S615: No), this winning process (S203) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, if it is during the small winning (S615: Yes), then, small winning opening/closing control processing for executing opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 according to the small winning game of each special symbol is executed (S616).

Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the small winning opening/closing control process (S616), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the small winning opening/closing control process (S616) of the first embodiment.

In this small winning opening/closing control process (S616), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set in the winning process (S203).

In this small hit opening and closing control process (S616), first, the opening time set in S609 of the winning process (S203), or set in S6320 (see FIG. 46 to be described later) of the small hitting opening process (S6306) to be described later It is determined whether or not the set interval time has elapsed (S6301). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has not passed (S6301: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the variable winning device 65 is kept closed, so S6302 to S6304 , and the process proceeds to S6305.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has passed (S6301: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so first, the winning counter (not shown) is set to " 10" is set (S6302), and then the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set (S6303). Then, it generates a large winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened, sets it in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6304), and proceeds to S6305.

In the processing of S6305, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small hit (S6305). As a result of determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win (S6305: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win, but during the opening time or the interval time. By skipping the processing of S6306, this small winning opening/closing control processing (S616) is terminated, and the processing returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, in the processing of S6305, if it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small hit (S6305: Yes), the small winning device 65 is opened in order to determine the closing condition of the open variable winning device 65 Intermediate processing is performed (S6306), this small winning opening/closing control processing (S616) is terminated, and the processing returns to winning processing (see FIG. 41).

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the small winning opening process (S6306), which is one process of the small winning opening/closing control process (S616) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the process (S6306) during small winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process (S6306) during small hit opening of 1st Embodiment, the process which discriminate|determines whether the closed condition of the variable winning device 65 in opening is satisfied is performed.

In this small winning opening processing (S6306), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6303 of the small winning opening/closing control processing (S616) has passed (S6311). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6311: Yes), the condition for closing the variable winning device 65 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in the round, so the winning In order to clear the counter value to "0" (S6312) and close the variable winning device 65, the process proceeds to S6316.

On the other hand, in the process of S6311, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S6311: No), then whether or not the large winning opening switch 65c (see FIG. 5) is turned on, that is, whether the variable winning It is determined whether or not the ball has won the device 65 (S6313).

In the process of S6313, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6313: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6314), then 1 is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6315). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6315: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and variable winning is achieved. Since the condition for closing the device 65 is satisfied, the process proceeds to S6316 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6316, first, the closing setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6316), and then the big winning indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been closed to the sound lamp control device 113. A mouth closing command is set (S6317), and the process proceeds to S6318. It should be noted that the large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6317 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 31). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S6318, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S6318), and the process proceeds to S6319.

In the process of S6319, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter decremented by 1 in the process of S6318 is greater than "0" (S6319). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6319: Yes), the number of rounds in the small win (number of times the variable winning device 65 remains open) remains, so the next variable winning Set the interval time (for example, "1 second") until the device 65 is opened (S6320), finish the small winning open processing (S6306), and return to the small winning opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, in the process of S6319, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0" (S6319: No), the number of rounds (variable winning Since the remaining number of openings of the device 65) does not remain, the process of S6320 is skipped, the small hit opening process (S6306) is ended, and the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 45) returns.

In the process of S6313, if it is determined that the ball has not won the variable winning device 65 (S6313: No), or in the process of S6315, it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0". If it is determined (S6315: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not established, and in order to continue opening the variable winning device 65, the processing of S6316 to S6320 is skipped, and this small winning The process during opening (S6306) is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 45).

Further, in the small winning game of each special symbol in the first embodiment, the opening in which 10 balls shot within the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the small winning of each special symbol cannot win a prize. Since it is set to time (that is, the special figure 1 per small is "0.1 seconds" and the special figure 2 per is "1.5 seconds"), it is not a closing condition based on the winning number condition, but a preset The closing condition of the variable winning device 65 based on the elapse of the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is easily established.

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 41, the description is continued. After the end of the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 45) of S616, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S617). As a result of the determination, if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S617: Yes), in order to continue the small hit, the process of S618, which is the end setting process of the small hit, is skipped and this hit process (S203) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S617: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the small winning state, small winning ending processing is performed (S618), this winning processing (S203) is completed, and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 41) back to

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211).

This normal pattern variation process (S211) is for controlling the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 83 due to passage of the ball through the through gate 67. FIG.

In the normal pattern variation process (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric player 72 is currently projecting (operating), that is, whether or not the normal pattern is winning (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electrode 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal pattern is in the process of winning, so the normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) ).

On the other hand, if the normal electric combination 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not during the winning of the normal symbols. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal design display device 83 is not in the variable display of the normal design (S702: No), then after the variable display in the normal design display device 83 stops, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second ”) It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the variable display (S703: No), the normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211) is ended and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is returned to. As a result, the stopped symbols in the variable display are displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbols.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S703, if a predetermined time has passed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (variable It is determined whether or not the displayed number of balls to be activated (HN) is greater than "0" (S704).

As a result of the process of S704, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (operation reserved ball number HN) is not greater than "0" (S704: No), there is a normal pattern variable display reserved ball number to be executed. Since it does not mean that it does not, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) ends and returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (actuated reserved ball number HN) is a value greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it means that it is time to start executing the variable display regarding the reserved normal pattern. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (operation reserved ball number HN) (S705). This is due to the processing (S706 to S712) to be described later, in accordance with the start of the execution of one variable display of the reserved variable display regarding the normal symbols, the number of reserved balls regarding the normal symbols decreases by one. It's for.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the normal map reserved ball storage area 203i (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203i toward the general pattern reservation ball execution area 203j. Reservation 1st area → Normal drawing reservation ball execution area 203j, Normal drawing reservation 2nd area → Normal drawing reservation 1st area, Normal drawing reservation 3rd area → Normal drawing reservation 2nd area, Normal drawing reservation 4th area → Normal drawing The data in each area is shifted, in a reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal design in the normal design display device 83 is variable based on the data (that is, the value of the counter C4 for the normal design) stored in the normal design reservation ball execution area 203j by the data shift processing. In order to perform a display, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving low probability flag 203n or the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S707). As a result of determination, if the time saving low probability flag 203n and the time saving high probability flag 203m are not turned on (S707: No), the "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is invalid Then, the normal symbol variable display time is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low-probability flag 203n or the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is turned on (S707: Yes), the "probability fluctuation state" in which the "time-saving function" is effective, the "normal figure high-probability time reduction state ' or 'normal pattern low probability time shortened state', the variable display time of the normal pattern is set to '0.1 second' (S709), and the process proceeds to S710.

In the process of S710, it is determined whether or not the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is turned on (S710), and if the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is not turned on (S710: No), that is, in the normal design low probability state , referring to the group for the low probability state in the random number table 202h per normal pattern, the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j is determined, and the stop pattern of the variable display of the normal pattern is determined. (That is, the propriety of the normal design) is determined (S711). Also, if the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S710: Yes), that is, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, refer to the group for the high probability state in the random number table 202h per normal pattern, and hold the normal pattern The value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the ball execution area 203j is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, the propriety of the normal symbol) is determined (S712). After the processing of S711 and S712, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is finished, and it returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

As a result, by changing the win/loss probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to determine whether or not the normal electric combination 72 is likely to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits to the right. can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is a situation where the normal electric 72 is likely to open (that is, a state with a high probability of normal symbols) and is likely to flow into the lower second starting port 71a side. , a situation in which it is more difficult to open the ordinary electric ring 72 than in a situation in which it is easy to open (that is, a low probability state of ordinary symbols), and the upper surface of the closed (protruding) ordinary electric ring 72 is rolled from the left end to the right end. Depending on the game state, it is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by varying the situation in which the game can flow into the variable winning device 65 side.

In the processing of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not passed (S713: No), the normal symbol display device 83 is displayed. is updated (S714), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has passed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S711 or S712 to the normal symbol display device 83 is set (S715), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal design display device 83 is set based on the normal design variation processing (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal design display device 83. until the variable display time elapses, the "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. When the result of the variable display is a win, the symbol "O" is lit, and when the result is a loss, the symbol "X" is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, normal electric control processing (S204), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal electric duty control process (S204).

In this normal electric role control process (S204), when a normal symbol hit occurs, opening/closing (protrusion and immersion) drive control of the normal electric role 72 is executed according to the game state. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric part 72 is set according to the game state, and the normal electric part 72 is driven to open based on the set time, and when the set projecting time elapses, it is opened. A control is executed to close (protrude) the ordinary electric terminal 72 during (immersion).

In the normal electric role control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric role 72 is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbols are winning (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbols are not winning, next, whether the variable display of the normal symbols has ended. It is determined whether or not (S802).

As a result of the determination in S802, if the variable display of normal symbols has not ended (S802: No), the normal electric role control process (S204) is ended and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is returned to. If the variable display of the normal symbols has ended (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a win has been won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the win has not been won in the variable display (S803: No), this ordinary electric role control process (S204) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) back to On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is won in the variable display (S803: Yes), in order to execute the control related to the winning, first, the time saving low probability flag 203n or the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on. (S804).

As a result of the determination in S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203n and the time saving high probability flag 203m are not turned on (S804: No), the “normal game state” or “latency” in which the “time saving function” is invalid probability fluctuation state", set the opening time of the ordinary electric worker 72 in the winning state to "0.1 second" based on the specified contents of the ordinary electric worker opening table 202j (S805), and based on the hit In order to open the normal power supply 72 once, the value of the power supply counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S806), and the process proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, in the process of S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203n or the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S804: Yes), the "time saving function" is effective "probability fluctuation state", "normal It is determined that it is a high probability time shortening state” or “normal low probability time shortening state”, and the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric worker 72 in the winning state is “ 5.8 seconds” (S807), and in order to open the normal electric circuit 72 once based on the hit, set the value of the electric circuit counter (not shown) to “1” (S808 ), and the process proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, the normal electric part 72 is opened (immersed) (S809), the normal electric part 72 is driven from the closed (protruding) state to the open state, and the normal electric part control process (S204) is executed. Terminates and returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

As a result, when the player hits to the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged, and the state in which the ordinary electric terminal 72 is open is long or short. can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided toward the lower second starting port 71a, or rolls completely on the upper surface of the normal electric element 72 from the left end to the right end when the normal electric element 72 is closed. By making the state in which the ball can flow down to the variable winning device 65 side differ depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

In the process of S801, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of winning, then It is determined whether or not the normal electric circuit 72 has been opened once (S810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the set opening time of the ordinary electric circuit 72 has not passed (S810: No), S811 to S813 are executed in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72. The process is skipped, the normal electric duty control process (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S810, if it is determined that the set opening time of the normal electric terminal 72 has passed (S810: Yes), first, the closing (protruding) process of the normal electric terminal 72 is executed. (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric duty counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the electric duty counter is greater than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), the number of times the normal electric service 72 is opened remains based on the hit, so the process is executed. The process proceeds to S809, and after a predetermined interval process is performed, the normal electric circuit 72 is opened again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the service counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the service counter is less than or equal to "0", the normal service based on pertinence is determined. 72 has been completely opened, the ordinary electric circuit 72 is not reopened, the ordinary electric circuit control processing (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power failure occurrence information settings (S901). ), ending the NMI interrupt processing.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 56. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 50) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 51) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 50, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. 51) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 51, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110, it executes power-off processing in S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 51). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), the effect The left-handed hitting instruction performed flag 223i is set to ON (S1051), and the right-handed hitting instruction performed flag 223j for effect is set to OFF (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), left-handed for effect The instruction executed flag 223i is set to ON (S1051), and the effect hitting right instruction executed flag 223j is set to OFF (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a setting value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in a setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the main processing ( 51).

In this manner, in the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113, the main processing (see FIG. 51) is started until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 28) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability set value set by the main controller 110, and the main processing and subsequent processing can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main controller 110, the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not reached the final stage, and the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not ended normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not terminated normally, and the process is not shifted to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp whether or not the start-up processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a non-existent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the processing of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if "1 millisecond or more" has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short period (within "1 millisecond"), whereas S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S1101, when it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 50, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107, which will be described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds"). 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a winning effect process for executing an effect related to a big win set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. In the first embodiment, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened or a right-handed notification is given during the opening of the variable winning device 65 related to the jackpot by the first special symbol and the second special symbol) performance).

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and during the valid period, the frame button is pressed. This is processing for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main controller 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Variation effect processing corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed based on the special figure 2 stop type command (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1151. The details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1151, in order to display the main display right-handed instruction 89 and the production hitting instruction on the third symbol display device 81, the current game state and the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are determined, and each A command for displaying how to play is set, and the process proceeds to S1111. The details of this hitting instruction display process (S1151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, the update of a counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, and the update of a pending change counter (not shown) that draws a lottery for "pending change notice" are performed in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment) and resetting it to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

When the process of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 determine the command.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of determination, if a command has been received from main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, It is determined whether or not a command (that is, a special figure 1 variation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) related to dynamic display (variation effect) of 1 special symbol is received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is received (S1202: Yes), special figure 1 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51).

Here, with reference to Drawing 53, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 53 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1221). As a result of determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation performance process (see FIG. 55) described later, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 52 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1223). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command is received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 55) described later, the variable effect of the first special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to ON (S1225), this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 52).

In addition, the special figure 1 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 1 variation pattern command when starting the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S1225, in the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 55) executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the first reserved ball number command Determination of whether the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the first pending ball number command, and the first extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the first special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1223, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1226). The special figure 1 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the first special symbol when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S1226: Yes), when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114, the variation of the first special symbol Set the special figure 1 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1227), terminate this special figure 1 command process (S1203), and return to the command determination process (see FIG. 52).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the first special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the symbol, if the variation performance of the first special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1226, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), the process related to the variation effect of the other first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is not received (S1202: No), then the second special symbol is dynamically displayed by the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not a command (that is, a special figure 2 variation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, or a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) related to display (variation effect) is received (S1204). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) is received (S1204: Yes), special figure 2 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51).

Here, with reference to Drawing 54, special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 54 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1231). As a result of determination, if the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation performance process (see FIG. 55) described later, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 52 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1233). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 55) described later, the variable effect of the second special symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to ON (S1235), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 52).

In addition, the special figure 2 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 2 variation pattern command when starting the variation production of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to ON by the processing of S1235, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 55) to be executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the second pending ball number command Determination of whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the second pending ball number command, and the second extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the second special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and an abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1233, if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1236). The special figure 2 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the second special symbol when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S1236: Yes), when the second special symbol variation effect is executed for the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation Set the special figure 2 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1237), terminate this special figure 2 command processing (S1205), and return to the command determination processing (see FIG. 52).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the second special symbol variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the second special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the pattern, when the variation performance of the second special pattern is not executed in the third pattern display device 81, the special figure 2 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1236, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S1236: No), the process related to the variation effect of the other second special symbol is performed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is not received (S1204: No), then the main controller 110 issues the first reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S1206). When it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 5) of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved by the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are also included in the first reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-first reserved ball number updated in S1207. Stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first suspension information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the counter 223c (S1208). Then, the display first reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol is set to the display control device 114 (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 51).

Here, the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning), so the process of S1207 is performed each time there is a starting winning. Thus, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223 c of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first reservation information storage area 223e. That is, when the variable performance of the reserved first special symbol is executed, how the result of the variable performance will be (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the process of S1206, if it is determined that the first pending ball number command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 5) of main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect reserved by the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the second reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-second reserved ball number updated in S1211. Stored in the second pending information storage first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variation effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 51).

Here, the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (start winning), so the starting Every time there is a prize, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1211. Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice The value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223 d of the lamp controller 113 can be corrected to match the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second reservation information storage area 223f. That is, when the suspended second special symbol variable performance is executed, how the result of the variable performance will be (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the process of S1210, if it is determined that the second pending ball number command has not been received (S1210: No), then the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1216), and this command determination process ( S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used in the display control device 114, the command is set to the display control device 114 . For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then output as a command for the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by processing (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This variable effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 is 2 Executes various processes for executing the variation effect of the special symbol. Specifically, if the game state is the "normal game state", the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the display regarding the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed. is configured not to In addition, if the game state is "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the main of the third symbol display device 81 While performing the variation performance of the second special symbol in the display area Dm, it is configured not to perform the display related to the variation performance of the first special symbol.

In the fluctuation production process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so the first special In order to start the variation effect of the design, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), then the data contained in the first suspension information storage first area provided in the first suspension information storage area 223e 1 execution information storage area 223g (S1303). It shifts to the third area (S1304), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub-first ball count counter 223c (S1305), and proceeds to S1306.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information first area corresponding to the variable production that has been performed are changed to the values of the first special symbols that are being executed. 1 to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 are stored in the first execution information storage area 223g. Each counter C1 stored in the first reservation first to fourth areas of the first reservation ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 is stored in the first reservation information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223e. The same values as those of C3 and CS1 are stored.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (S1306). As a result of determination, if it is determined that it is not "normal game state" (S1306: No), that is, "general pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low When it is determined that it is the “probable time shortening state”, it is a gaming state in which the second special symbol variation performance is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the first special symbol variation performance is performed. Since there is not, the processing of S1307 to S1309 is skipped, this variation effect processing (S1110) is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 51) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, when it is determined that the current game state is the "normal game state" (S1306: Yes), the first special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Since this is a game state, first, based on the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the processing of S1305, the first reserved ball number command for display is set (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. do.

The first pending ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 51). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls in the variable effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is obtained, Based on the variation pattern, a special figure 1 variation pattern command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1309. .

The display special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 51) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command. Then, display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1309, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is obtained, Based on the stop type, the special figure 1 stop type command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1309), and this variation effect process (S1110 ) and return to the main process (see FIG. 51).

The display special figure 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 51) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1309, this display special figure 1 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1310 ). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1310: Yes), both the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so the second special In order to start the variation effect of the design, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1311), then the data contained in the second reservation information storage first area provided in the second reservation information storage area 223f 2 execution information storage area 223h (S1312), and further, the data contained in the second pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second pending information storage area 223f are transferred to the first pending information storage first to fourth areas. It shifts to the third area (S1313), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (S1314), and proceeds to S1315.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the variable production that has been performed are changed to the values of the second special symbols that are being executed. 2 to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth area for storing the second pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing the second pending information.

As a result, the second execution information storage area 223h stores the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold ball execution area 203g of the main controller 110. Each counter C1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 is stored in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223f. The same values as those of C3 and CS1 are stored.

In the process of S1315, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (S1315). As a result of the determination, if it is the "normal game state" (S1315: Yes), it is a game state in which the first special symbol is varied in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol. , the process of S1316 to S1318 is skipped, the variable effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1315, if it is determined that the current game state is not the "normal game state" (S1316: No), that is, the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability When it is determined that it is "variation state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", it is a game state in which the second special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. , the second reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1314 (S1316), and the process proceeds to S1317.

The second pending ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 51). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1317, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is obtained, A special figure 2 variation pattern command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (S1317), and the process proceeds to S1318. .

The display special figure 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 51) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1318, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the stop type of the second special symbol variation effect to be executed from now on is obtained, Based on the stop type, a special figure 2 stop type command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1318), and this variation effect process (S1110 ) and return to the main process (see FIG. 51).

The display special figure 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 51) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1317, this display special figure 2 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the hitting instruction display process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this playing instruction display process (S1151).

In this hitting instruction display process (S1151), the current game state is determined, and if the game state is for a right-handed game, a main display right-handed instruction 89 is displayed, and after the right-handed game is started, an effect If the playing method instruction has not been executed even once, the performance playing method instruction is given. In addition, if the game state is to perform a left-handed game, the main display right-handed instruction 89 is erased, and after the start of the left-handed game, if the performance-use instruction is not executed even once, then the performance is displayed. Give instructions on how to hit.

In this hitting instruction display process (S1151), first, it is determined whether or not the player is in a "normal game state" in which a left-handed game is played (S1401). As a result of determination, if it is not in the "normal game state" (S1401: No), that is, "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", it is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed, so it is determined whether or not the main display right-handed instruction 89 has been displayed (S1402), and if the main display right-handed instruction 89 has not been displayed (S1402: No), a right-handed instruction display command for main display is set (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1402, if the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 has already been displayed (S1402: Yes), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the effect hitting right instruction execution completion flag 223j is turned on (S1404). After the game state shifts from the beating game to the right beating game, since the performance beating instruction has been executed even once, the processing of S1405 to S1408 is skipped, and this beating instruction display processing (S1151) is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1404, if the effect right-handed instruction execution completion flag 223j is not turned on (S1404: No), the game state is shifted from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the performance is performed once. Since the usage instruction has not been executed, it is determined whether or not the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 in order to execute the performance usage instruction (S1405). ). As a result of the determination, in the third symbol display device 81, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (S1405: Yes), that is, the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and the right-handed Although it has shifted to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the game is played, it is in the state of executing the fluctuation performance of the first special pattern that was executed in the third pattern display device 81 during the left-handed game. (Refer to timing 5 in FIG. 19 and FIG. 58(d)) In this state, the processing of S1406 to S1408 is skipped, and the playing instruction display processing (S1151) is completed without performing the performance playing instruction. and return to the main process (see FIG. 51).

As a result of the determination of S1405, in the third symbol display device 81, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is not being executed (S1405: No), that is, the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and the right A state in which the state is shifted to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' in which the hitting game is performed, and the variation performance of the first special pattern executed in the third pattern display device 81 during the left-hand hitting game is finished. Therefore, (see timing 6 in FIG. 19 and FIG. 59(c)), a right-handed instruction command for production is set (S1406), and a right-handed instruction for production instruction execution completion flag 223j is set. It is set to ON (S1407), the effect left-hand hitting instruction executed flag 223i is set to OFF (S1408), this hitting instruction display processing (S1151) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 51). .

By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, the variation performance of the first special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game is being executed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the production hitting instruction. In addition, at the timing when the game state is switched from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, if the variation performance of the first special symbol that has been executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game is not being executed, once It is possible to execute the performance hitting instruction only. As a result, the player who is still executing the left-handed game at the timing of reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed and transitioning to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is performed While the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the instruction for striking for performance is not displayed, so the variation of the first special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81. You can increase your interest in the performance. Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation performance of the first special symbol which has been executed on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, and the player can hit the right hand without a sense of incongruity. You can start playing.

In the process of S1401, if it is determined that the player is in the "normal game state" (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the main display right-handed instruction 89 has been erased (S1409), and the main display right-handed instruction is determined. If 89 has not been erased (S1409: No), the main display right-hand hitting instruction erase command is set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1409, if the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 has been erased (S1409: Yes), the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, it is determined whether or not the left-handed effect instruction execution completion flag 223i is turned on (S1411). After the game state shifts from the beating game to the left-handed game, since the performance beating instruction has been executed even once, the processing of S1413 to S1415 is skipped, and this beating instruction display processing (S1151) is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1411, if the effect left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i is not turned on (S1411: No), the game state is shifted from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, and the effect is produced once. Since the usage instruction has not been executed, it is determined whether or not the variation performance of the second special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 in order to execute the performance usage instruction (S1412). ). As a result of determination, in the third symbol display device 81, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is being executed (S1412: Yes), that is, the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" or "normal Although the time-saving end condition is established in the "low probability time shortening state" and the state is shifted to the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, the second pattern display device 81 executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game Since it is in the state of executing the variable performance of the special symbol, in this state, the performance hitting instruction is not performed, the processing of S1413 to S1415 is skipped, and this hitting instruction display processing (S1151) is completed. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 51).

As a result of the determination of S1412, in the third symbol display device 81, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is not being executed (S1412: No), that is, the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" or " The time-saving end condition is satisfied in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the state is shifted to the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and the third symbol display device 81 is running during the right-handed game. Since the variable performance of the second special symbol has been completed, the left-handed instruction command for performance is set (S1413), and the left-handed instruction performed flag 223i for performance is turned on in order to instruct the hitting method for performance. (S1414), the effect right-handed instruction executed flag 223j is set to off (S1415), the hitting instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51).

By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, the variation performance of the second special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game is being executed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the production hitting instruction. Further, at the timing when the game state is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, if the second special symbol variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game is not being executed, It is possible to execute a hitting instruction. As a result, the time-saving end condition is established in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" to perform the right-handed game, and at the timing of shifting to the "normal game state" to perform the left-handed game For the player who is still playing the right-handed game, while the variation performance of the second special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the performance hitting instruction is not displayed, so the third symbol. Interest can be heightened by the variation performance of the second special symbol being executed on the display device 81.例文帳に追加Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation effect of the second special symbol, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, ends, the hitting instruction for the effect of the left-handed game is displayed, and the player can A left-handed game can be started without discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the effect hitting instruction display is configured to determine the game state and the special symbol fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 and control whether or not to display it. , the right-handed instruction 89 for main display is configured to be displayed in synchronization with the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 at all times. For this reason, for example, like timing 5 in FIG. In the symbol display device 81, the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed, and even if the performance hitting instruction is not executed, the player is shown the main display right hitting instruction 89. It is possible to switch to a right-handed game by confirming that there is.

In addition, in the "normal game state", when the right-handed game is performed, even if the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed, it is configured to display the instruction for the performance of the left-handed game. You may Since the right-handed game in the "normal game state" is not a recommended shooting mode, temporarily, after determining whether or not the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "Please return to the left-handed". If the instruction is withheld, the effect hitting instruction will not be displayed during the variable effect of the first special symbol. For this reason, the effect hitting instruction for warning the player is configured to be immediately displayed regardless of whether or not the special symbol variation effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57 to FIG. 59, the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" will be described. Figures 57 to 59 show the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 which is performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state". Fig. 3 shows.

Figures 57(a) to 57(d) show, in the conventional pachinko machine, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". FIG. 57(a) is a diagram showing the transition, and FIG. 57(a) shows the variable display of the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 57(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only is being executed, and FIG. 57(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol ends from the state of FIG. FIG. 57(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the variable display is reduced to one more time, and FIG. 57(c) shows that the variable display next to the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. In the central part of the display area Dm, while the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is being executed, it is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is also started, Fig. 57(d) , From the state of FIG. 57(c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" and the right hitting instruction 89 for main display and for production It is the figure which showed the state where how-to-play instructions are displayed.

Figures 58(a) to 59(d) show the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment when the ceiling is reached by the second special symbol variation effect during the "normal game state". FIG. 58(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 58(a) is a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 58(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only the variable display of symbols is being executed, and FIG. 58(b) is from the state of FIG. 58(a) until the variable display of the first special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling. 58(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol is reduced to one more time, and FIG. 58(c) shows that the next variable display of the first special symbol is displayed from the state of FIG. 58(b). It is a diagram showing a state in which the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started, and FIG. 58(d) , From the state of FIG. 58(c), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling, and the state shifts to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" and only the main display right-handed instruction 89 is displayed. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the effect hitting instruction is not executed. FIG.

FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the effect result of losing in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode executed in the variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 58(d) is displayed. FIG. 59(b) shows that, from the state of FIG. 59(a), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode executed in the variable display of the first special symbol ends, resulting in a loss. FIG. 59(c) shows a state in which the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, and FIG. 59(c) shows the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which it is notified that the state has shifted to "probable time shortening state", and the instruction for playing for production is being executed, and FIG. The notification of the transition to the low probability time shortening state and the instruction for the production hitting method are completed, and the third pattern displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the

FIG. 57(a) shows that only the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more times during the "normal game state". state. FIG. 57(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 57(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the previous stop symbol "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the second special symbol is displayed. is displayed as being unexecuted (stopped). Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" that can be shifted when reaching the ceiling may be referred to as "play time".

Next, FIG. 57(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 57(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 57(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 57(a), is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 57(a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 57(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 57(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 57(b), and the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It is in the middle, showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol has also been started. Also, FIG. 57(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 57(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. Also, FIG. 57(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played, but the player makes a mistake in operating the operation handle 51 for shooting a ball, and the ball enters the right-handed game area. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 57(d), from the state of FIG. 57(c), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" for the main display It shows a state in which a right hitting instruction 89 and an effect hitting instruction are displayed. Also, FIG. 57(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 57(d), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 57(c), is still being executed. A state that the variable display of 1 special symbol is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that started execution in FIG. 57(c) is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 57(c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". For this reason, the main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, the first special symbol “Super Reach” production mode variation production is displayed. A hitting instruction 81d is displayed.

Thus, in the conventional pachinko machine, regardless of the execution content in the third pattern display device 81, at the timing of reaching the ceiling from the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" The right hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction are displayed. For this reason, from the player's point of view, a display suggesting a right-handed game suddenly appears while they are increasing their interest in the execution of the variable performance of the "super reach" performance mode, which is highly expected for a big win. There is a possibility that the game will be aroused. In addition, even though the variable performance with a high expectation for the big win of the first special symbol, which started to be executed during the left-handed game, is being executed, the performance hitting instruction is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. There is a possibility that the player may be confused as to whether or not the right-handed game should be started.

Next, FIG. 58(a) shows that only the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more. It shows the state of being. FIG. 58(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 58(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed, the stop symbol "261" of the previous variation table is displayed on the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. 2 It is displayed that the variable display of special symbols is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling.

Next, FIG. 58(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 58(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 58(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 58(a), is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 58(a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 58(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 58(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 58(b), and the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It is in the middle, showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol has also started. 58(c) is the same game state as timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 58(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, FIG. 58(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 58(d), from the state of FIG. 58(c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first, reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" and main display This shows a state in which only the right-hand hitting instruction 89 is displayed, and the performance hitting instruction has not been executed. Also, FIG. 58(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 58(d), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 58(c), is still being executed. A state that the variable display of 1 special symbol is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that started execution in FIG. 58(c) is completed, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 58(c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the effect hitting right instruction 81d is not displayed as shown in FIG. 57(d).

Next, in FIG. 59(a), from the state of FIG. 58(d), the effect result of losing the "super reach" effect mode variation effect which is executed in the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. state. FIG. 59(a) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. In FIG. 59(a), the variation effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 58(d), is still being executed. A state that the variable display of 1 special symbol is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a state is shown in which an effect result that is a failure is displayed in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution has ended in FIG. , "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b, and it is displayed that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed. The displayed ceiling reaching counter 81c is erased. By configuring in this way, the player can increase interest in the variation effect of the first special symbol executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, in FIG. 59(b), from the state of FIG. 59(a), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode, which has been executed in the variable display of the first special symbol, ends, and the third symbol to be lost is displayed. The state displayed in the main display area Dm is shown. Also, FIG. 59(b) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. In FIG. 59(b), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. , "434" indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and stopped is displayed. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 59(c), it is notified that the main display area Dm has reached the ceiling from the state of FIG. is running. Also, FIG. 59(c) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 19, which is the state immediately after FIG. 59(b). In FIG. 59(c), since one of the three holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. On the other hand, unlike Figure 58 (a) to Figure 59 (b), in Figure 59 (c), the first special symbol is a variable display that started execution after the transition to "normal figure low probability time reduction state" Therefore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the first special symbol is not executed, and the character message 81e of "play time rush" indicating that the ceiling has been reached and the effect suggesting a right-handed game A right hitting instruction 81d and a character message 81f are displayed. Note that the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 is continuously displayed even when the effect right-hand hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f are displayed. As a result, both the effect right-hand hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f and the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 can be displayed, and either display can accurately suggest the game content to the player, and the effect right hitting instruction 81d can be displayed. By continuing to display the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 regardless of whether the hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f are displayed, the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 is erased by executing the performance right-hand hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f. Since such control is not required, the control load can be reduced.

Next, in FIG. 59(d), from the state in FIG. 59(c), the entry notification to the “normal figure low probability time shortening state” and the instruction for hitting for production are completed, and displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm The 3rd design to be carried out has shown the state switched from the 1st special design to the 2nd special design. FIG. 59(d) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 19, which is the state immediately after FIG. 59(c). In FIG. 59(d), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 59(c) is still being executed. A state that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is the second special symbol, and in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is performed, the second special symbol is displayed. A state in which the variable effect corresponding to the dynamic display is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", during the "normal game state" While the execution is started and the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81 is being executed, the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol causes the "normal Even if it shifts to "low probability time shortening state", it is configured not to give instructions on how to play for performance. By configuring in this way, a player who is playing a left-handed game can be more interested in the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation performance of the first special symbol which has been executed on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, so that the player can play the right-handed game without any sense of incongruity. can start.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and the transition to the "normal game state" is performed, the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" During the execution of dynamic display of the second special symbol executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Even if it shifts to a ``normal game state'', it is configured so as not to give instructions on how to play for performance (instructions on how to play for performance). By configuring in this way, a player who is playing a right-handed game can be more interested in the second special symbol variation effect being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation performance of the second special symbol which has been executed on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, so that the player can play the left-handed game without a sense of incongruity. can start.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 69. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", dynamic display of special symbols "900 times", which is the number of times the ceiling is reached. is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the first special symbol dynamic display jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", out of the "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached, Until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed "899 times", the third symbol display device 81 carries out a variable performance as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbols is won or not, and the "900th". The dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured to perform an effect to inform that the ceiling is reached.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 60, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment. The main difference between the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment and the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment is that the RAM 223 contains: The point is that a ceiling-reaching counter 223k and a ceiling-reaching notification flag 223m are added.

The ceiling reaching count counter 223k counts whether or not to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". This is a counter for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 has reached the ceiling in the variable display of the first special symbol of the "900th time". In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the special symbol low probability state, the variable display executed at the "900th time" of the special symbol, that is, the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k reaches "899". When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the player has reached the ceiling.

This ceiling reaching count counter 223k is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on and when the ceiling counting start command is received (see S1010 in FIG. 50 and S1252 in FIG. 62). Then, in the low probability state of the special pattern, that is, the "normal game state", the "normal high probability time reduction state" or the "normal low probability time reduction state", the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command When received, 1 is added (S1262 in FIG. 63 or S1272 in FIG. 64). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k reaches "899", the variable display of the first special symbol starts execution, that is, in the low probability state of the special symbol When the variable display of the first special symbol of "900th time" starts to be executed, the ceiling reaching effect command is set (see S1503 in FIG. 66), and the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. is configured to

Then, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached in the "900th" first special symbol variation display, and when the "900th" variation display is completed, the ceiling is reached and the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" is entered. In order to make the transition, the performance hitting instruction is executed.

The ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is a flag for determining whether or not the third symbol display device 81 has once notified that the ceiling has been reached in the special symbol low probability state. This ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is set to OFF when the power is turned on and when the ceiling counting start command is received (see S1010 in FIG. 50 and S1253 in FIG. 62). Then, when the "900th" first special symbol variation display in the special symbol low probability state starts to be executed, and when the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is set to off, it is set to on. (See S1504 in FIG. 66).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is set to ON, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed after the "900th time" in the low probability state of the special symbol. In the starting situation, if the third pattern display device 81 has notified that the ceiling has been reached even once (see S1502 in FIG. 66: Yes), the ceiling reaching notification effect is not executed again. By referring to the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m, execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect can be limited to one time.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61, the jackpot ending process (S610), which is one process of the winning process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (S610) in the second embodiment. The difference between the jackpot end processing of the second embodiment and the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment is that processing for setting a ceiling count start command is added when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won. be.

In the jackpot end processing (S610) of the second embodiment, in the processing of S6104, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot type "probability A" (S6104: No), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type " Time saving A” is determined, and following the processing of S6106 and S6107, a ceiling count start command is set (S6151), and the process proceeds to S6108. The ceiling counting start command set in the process of S6151 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. , and transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ceiling counting start command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the ceiling reaching counting counter 223k to "0" in the command determination process of the second embodiment described later, turns off the ceiling reaching notified flag, and Preparations are made to count the number of executions of symbol variation display (see FIG. 62).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The difference between each control process of the second embodiment and each control process of the first embodiment is mainly that the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 adds a counting process of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols. and a ceiling arrival notification process is added for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 has reached the ceiling according to the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol.

First, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the command determination process (S1111) of the second embodiment. The difference between the command determination process of the second embodiment and the command determination process of the first embodiment is that it is determined whether or not a ceiling counting start command has been received, and if the ceiling counting start command has been received, the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is set to "0" to turn off the ceiling reaching notification flag.

In the command determination process (S1111) of the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1210 that the second reserved ball number command has not been received (S1210: No), then the ceiling counting start command has been received. Determines whether (S1251), if the ceiling counting start command is received (S1251: Yes), in order to start counting the number of executions of the variable display of the special design in the low probability state of the special design, reaching the ceiling The counting counter 223k is set to "0" (S1252), the ceiling reaching notification flag is set to off (S1253), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51). .

Then, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63, the special figure 1 command process (S1203) performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the second embodiment. The difference between the special figure 1 command process of the second embodiment and the special figure 1 command process of the first embodiment is that when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the addition process of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is added. It is a point.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command is received in the process of S1226 (S1226: Yes), after executing the process of S1227, the low probability of the special symbol It is determined whether it is in the state (S1261). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1261: Yes), 1 is added to the ceiling reaching count counter 223k (S1262), this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process ( 52).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1261, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a low probability state (S1261: No), the processing of S1262 is not performed, and other corresponding processing of S1228 is executed, and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) and return to the command determination process (see FIG. 52).

Then, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64, the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Figure 64 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) of 2nd execution form. The difference between the special figure 2 command processing of the second embodiment and the special figure 2 command processing of the first embodiment is that when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the addition process of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is added. It is a point.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205) of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command is received in the process of S1236 (S1236: Yes), after executing the process of S1237, the low probability of the special symbol It is determined whether or not it is in the state (S1271). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1271: Yes), 1 is added to the ceiling reaching count counter 223k (S1272), this special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process ( 52).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1271, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a low probability state (S1271: No), the processing of S1272 is not performed, and other corresponding processing of S1238 is executed, and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) and return to the command determination process (see FIG. 52).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1110) of the second embodiment. The difference between the variation effect processing of the second embodiment and the variation effect processing of the first embodiment is that in the variation that reaches the ceiling (that is, the "900th" variation in the low probability state of the special symbol), the The point is that the three-symbol display device 81 adds an effect to notify that the player has reached the ceiling.

In the variation effect processing (S1110) of the second embodiment, after the processing of S1309 is finished, the number of rotations until reaching the ceiling is determined, and the ceiling reaching notification processing is executed to notify that the ceiling has been reached according to the determination result ( S1351), this variation effect processing (S1110) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 51).

Here, the ceiling arrival notification process (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the ceiling reaching notification process (S1351).

In this ceiling reaching notification process (S1351), the number of revolutions until reaching the ceiling is determined, and a ceiling reaching effect command for notifying that the ceiling has been reached is set according to the determination result.

In this ceiling reach notification process (S1351), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is smaller than "899" (S1501). If so (S1501: Yes), since the "900th" variation for executing the ceiling reaching notification effect has not been reached, the processing of S1502 to S1504 is skipped, and this ceiling reaching notification processing (S1351) ends. Then, the process returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 65).

On the other hand, as a result of determination in S1501, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is not less than "899", that is, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is greater than or equal to "899" (S1501: No) ceiling reach notification effect , and then it is determined whether or not the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1502), and if the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is not turned on ( S1502: No), since the ceiling reaching notification effect has not been executed even once after reaching the "900th" change to reach the ceiling, the ceiling reaching effect command is set (S1503), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is set. The end flag 223m is set to ON (S1504), the ceiling reaching notification process (S1351) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 65).

As a result of the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1502: Yes), the ceiling is reached even once after reaching the "900th" change to reach the ceiling. Since the notification effect is being executed and there is no need to execute the ceiling reaching notification effect, the processes of S1503 and S1504 are skipped, the ceiling reaching notification process (S1351) is terminated, and the fluctuation effect process (Fig. 65 ).

By constructing in this way, execution of the ceiling reaching notification performance is limited to one time from the transition to the low probability state of the special pattern until the ceiling is reached and the transition to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' is performed. be able to.

In addition, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is constructed so that a small win can be won in addition to the big win, and the variable prize for the small win is opened based on the winning of the small win game. A pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2) equipped with a device and a time-saving region (so-called V region) in which a big win and a "time-saving function" are given due to the ball passing through the variable winning device for small wins. Using a seed mixer), based on the number of times the “time saving function” is given, the “time reduction state” (for example, the first game state) is configured to shift to the “normal game state” (for example, the second game state). You may In this case, in the "time reduction state", the end condition of the "time reduction variation" is set to the case where the second special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, "7 times"), and the second special symbol dynamic When the display reaches the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "reaching dynamic display") is started, the condition for starting the dynamic display of the second special symbol even during the execution of the reaching dynamic display can be acquired, and the number of executions of dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is the condition for ending the "time shortening state" (for example, the maximum number of pending balls of the second special symbol. So-called remaining pending. Hereinafter, The effect for the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be referred to as "remaining reserved effect".) In some cases, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed. In such a model, in the variable performance related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time shortening state", not only the performance related to the dynamic display of the arrival, but also the dynamic display of the second special symbol for the remaining pending There is a case where the remaining pending effect is executed by extending to. That is, the arrival dynamic display of the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the remaining reserved second special symbol are a series of variable effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "series variable effect". Transition suggestive effect.) is configured to run as Here, at the stage when the reaching dynamic display ends, the game state changes from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state" (for example, non derivation transition means), but during the execution of the dynamic display of the remaining reserved second special symbol, it is configured to continue the series of variable effects (for example, effect continuation means). Then, after the series of variable effects is completed, it is suggested to the player that it has returned to the "normal game state" (for example, the screen layout of the "normal game state", etc., and the effect after transition), and the firing mode is changed to " Executes an effect (for example, "Please return to left-handed" etc. Corrective performance) from the right-handed game in the time shortening state to the left-handed game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand. In addition, in the series of variable production, by executing the number of jackpots that occurred continuously during the "time reduction state" and the total number of game balls acquired (for example, situation production), the player in the "time reduction state" It is possible for the player to grasp the game value and the number of consecutive houses acquired by the player, and the game result can be configured so that the player can recognize it, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, if you win a big hit (small hit) in the dynamic display of the second special pattern for the remaining reserved portion, you can switch the production screen while displaying the above-mentioned series of variable productions, or make the character pattern appear. Alternatively, a surprise performance may be executed to suddenly inform that a big win or a small win has been won just before the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a game with unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is used as a trigger (eg, the first condition) to execute the above-mentioned series of variable effects, and the remaining dynamic display of the acquired second special symbol (eg, the second condition) is reserved. minute (for example, establishment number counting means) exists, the execution period of the end screen (for example, the first effect) of the series of fluctuation effects is extended by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. (for example, execution period rendering means). Then, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol for the remaining reserve, if a big win is won, a special effect ( For example, the third effect) is executed to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won (for example, the game state has changed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69, a description will be given of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the second embodiment. FIGS. 67 to 69 show the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect of.

Figures 67(a) to 67(d) show, in a conventional pachinko machine, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". FIG. 67(a) is a diagram showing the transition, and FIG. 67(a) shows the variable display of the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 67(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only is being executed, and FIG. 67(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol ends from the state of FIG. FIG. 67(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the variable display has decreased to one more time, and FIG. 67(c) shows that the variable display next to the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. In the central part of the display area Dm, the effect of notifying that the ceiling is reached is being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. FIG. From the state of 67 (c), only the variable display of the second special symbol is completed during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect, and the ceiling is reached, and the state is shifted to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state" and the main display right hitting It is a diagram showing a state in which an instruction 89 and an effect hitting instruction are displayed.

Figures 68(a) to 69(d) show, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". FIG. 68(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 68(a) is a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 68(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only the variable display of symbols is being executed, and FIG. 68(b) is from the state of FIG. 68(a) until the variable display of the first special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling. 68(c) shows that the next variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 68(b) is 68 (d ), from the state of FIG. 68(c), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends during the execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, and the ceiling is reached, and the main FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which only a right-handed display instruction 89 is displayed, and no performance-oriented hitting instruction is executed.

69(a), from the state of FIG. 68(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed, and in FIGS. 68(a) to 68(d), the main It is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left part of the display area Dm is erased, FIG. FIG. 69(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the display has ended, and FIG. 69(c) shows that the ceiling reaching notification effect has ended from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which it is notified that the transition has been made, and the instruction for the production hitting method is being executed. A diagram showing a state in which the notification of the transition to and the instruction for hitting for production are completed, and the third pattern displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern is.

FIG. 67(a) shows that only the first special symbol variable display is being executed in the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the special symbol variable display until reaching the ceiling is two more. state. FIG. 67(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 67(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the reserved numbers of the two special symbols are "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message indicating that "two times" are left to reach the ceiling.

Next, FIG. 67(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 67(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 67(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 67(a) is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 67(a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 67(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 67(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 67(b), and an effect is being executed to notify that it will reach the ceiling in the central portion of the main display area Dm. , which indicates a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. Also, FIG. 67(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 67(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, FIG. 67(c) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, FIG. 67(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 67(d), from the state of FIG. 67(c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first, reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" and main display It shows a state in which a right-hand hitting instruction 89 and an effect hitting instruction are displayed. Also, FIG. 67(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 67(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. A state that the display is being executed is displayed. Also, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 67(c) is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 67(c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, and the right-handed hitting instruction for production is displayed in front of the ceiling reaching notification effect by the variable display of the first special symbol in the central part of the main display area Dm. 81d is displayed.

Thus, in the conventional pachinko machine, regardless of the execution content in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the "normal game state" reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". At the right timing, the main display hitting right instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction 89 are displayed, and from the player's point of view, the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted while the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed. A display suggesting a game will appear, and there is a possibility that the player will be aroused by the game.

Next, FIGS. 68(a) to 69(d) show the third symbol display in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment when reaching the ceiling due to the second special symbol variation effect during the "normal game state". FIG. 68(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the device 81, and FIG. 68(a) is a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state", It shows a state in which only the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. FIG. 68(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 68(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling.

Next, FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 68(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 68(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which was being executed in FIG. 68(a) is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until the ceiling is reached, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 68(a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 68(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 68(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 68(b), and an effect is being executed to notify that it will reach the ceiling in the central portion of the main display area Dm. , which indicates a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. Also, FIG. 68(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 68(c), one of the four reserved numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, FIG. 68(c) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol has started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, FIG. 68(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 68(d), from the state of FIG. 68(c), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" for the main display This shows a state in which only a right-handed hitting instruction 89 is displayed, and the performance hitting instruction is not executed. Also, FIG. 68(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 68(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. A state that the display is being executed is displayed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that started execution in FIG. 68(c) is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 68(c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, in the central portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display, reaching the ceiling. Since the notification effect is being executed, the effect hitting right instruction 81d is not displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 67(d), which is an example of a conventional pachinko machine.

Next, in FIG. 69(a), from the state of FIG. 68(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed, and FIG. 68(a) to FIG. 68(d). , the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm is erased. FIG. 69(a) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. In FIG. 69(a), the ceiling reaching notification effect that was being executed in FIG. 68(d) is still being executed, and in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. You can see what is going on. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution has ended in FIG. , "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b, and it is displayed that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, the ceiling reach counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in FIGS. 68(a) to 68(d) is deleted. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67(d), which is an example of a conventional pachinko machine, the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect. , the right hitting instruction 81d for effect is not displayed, and the player can increase interest in the ceiling reaching notification effect.

Next, FIG. 69(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol has ended from the state of FIG. 69(a). Also, FIG. 69(b) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. In FIG. 69(b), the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 69(a) is completed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and stopped in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. "434" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 69(c), the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed from the state of FIG. It shows a state in which direction instructions are being executed. FIG. 69(c) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 19, which is the state immediately after FIG. 69(b). In FIG. 69(c), one of the three holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. 69(b), the ceiling reaching notification effect being executed is finished, and a text message 81e of "enter play time" indicating that the ceiling has been reached, and a right-hand hitting instruction for effect suggesting a right-hand hitting game. 81d and text message 81f are displayed.

Next, in FIG. 69(d), from the state of FIG. 69(c), the notification of entry into the “normal figure low probability time shortening state” and the direction of hitting for production are completed, and displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm The 3rd design to be carried out has shown the state switched from the 1st special design to the 2nd special design. FIG. 69(d) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 19, which is the state immediately after FIG. 69(c). In FIG. 69(d), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 69(c) is still being executed. A state that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is the second special symbol, and in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is performed, the second special symbol is displayed. A state in which the variable effect corresponding to the dynamic display is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed.

Here, in the case where the random number value that will be won in the time-saving design is provided in the jackpot random number table 202a, in the example shown in FIG. Assume state. That is, in the "normal game state" (for example, the first game state), execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect (for example, the first effect) in the variable display (for example, the specific state) that the first special symbol reaches the ceiling In the meantime, if the variable display of the second special pattern wins the time saving pattern (for example, a specific condition), the transition to the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" (for example, the second game state) due to reaching the ceiling , The transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" (for example, the second game state) due to winning the time saving symbol will occur at the same time. Here, further, if the number of time reductions that can be granted by winning the time reduction pattern is set to "500 times", the number of time reductions that can be granted by reaching the ceiling is higher than the number of time reductions that can be granted by winning the time reduction pattern (" 1140 times”). Therefore, if the transition to "Normal low probability time reduction state" due to reaching the ceiling and the transition to "Normal low probability time reduction state" due to winning the time saving pattern occur at the same time, The transition to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' due to reaching the ceiling is preferentially executed, and the state is more advantageous for the player. By configuring in this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect (for example, the first effect) in the variable display (specific state) that the first special symbol reaches the ceiling. Even if the time-saving pattern is elected (for example, specific conditions), after the variable display of the second special pattern is completed, the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" due to reaching the ceiling will be performed. Therefore, the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol can be continuously executed without being interrupted on the way.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the first In the dynamic display of the special pattern, that is, the dynamic display scheduled to be the 900th time in the low probability state of the special pattern, the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 performs an effect to notify that the ceiling is reached. configured as follows. Also, while the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed (during the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm in the third design display device 81), the second special symbol is moving. Even if the player reaches the ceiling by execution of target display and shifts to a ``normal figure low probability time shortening state'', it is configured not to instruct how to hit for performance. By constructing in this way, the ceiling reaching notification effect being executed in the third pattern display device 81 is not interrupted by the direction of hitting for the effect, and the player can increase interest in the ceiling reaching notification effect. can. Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the ceiling reaching notification performance being executed on the third pattern display device 81 is finished, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, so that the player can start the right-hand hitting game without any sense of incongruity. can be done.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 75. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "899 times" out of "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the "900th" first special symbol is displayed. In the dynamic display, an effect for informing that the ceiling is reached is performed, and the effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is finished at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time" is finished.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the dynamic display of the "900th" first special symbol, the ceiling reaching notification effect is performed in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and the In the case where the dynamic display of the second special pattern is being executed in parallel with the execution of the ceiling reaching notification performance, the dynamic display of the second special pattern executes the ceiling reaching notification performance. When ending after the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect is extended until the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed ends. .

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first to second embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 70, the timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. In addition, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, and the normal The relationship between the process of variable display of symbols, the process of variable display of the first special symbol and the process of variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the normal electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65 will be described in the first embodiment. Since it is similar to the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 70 is a case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 during the "normal game state" in the third embodiment and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", and reaching the ceiling It is a timing chart when the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed in parallel at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol 1 ends.

As shown in FIG. 70, the variable display of the 899th and 900th rotations in the low probability state of the special symbol is executed by the variable display of the special symbol 1, and reaches the ceiling at the same time as the end of the variable display of the 900th rotation. Normal pattern low probability time shortening state” (see timing 2 in FIG. 70).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is assumed that the variable display of each special symbol such as the timing chart shown in FIG. 70 is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the variable display of the "900th" special symbol 1 that reaches the ceiling, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. It is configured. Therefore, the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed in the "900th" variable display of the special symbol 1, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is finished at the same time when the "900th" variable display ends (Fig. 73(a)-(b). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the end of the "900th" fluctuation display, the ceiling is reached and the state shifts to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", so the end timing of the "900th" fluctuation display (see timing 2 in FIG. 70) Then, the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed, and subsequently the main display right hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting direction instruction are executed (see FIG. 73(c)). Further, the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to switch from the special pattern 1 to the special pattern 2 after the completion of the effect hitting instruction. (See FIG. 73(d)).

Furthermore, at the timing 2 shown in FIG. 70, the variable display of the special symbol 2 executed in the main display area Dm is originally a variable effect in the "normal low probability time shortened state" (for example, the character talks Notice, etc.) should be executed, but the variable display of the special symbol 2 that is being executed at the timing 2 shown in FIG. The display special figure 2 variation pattern command and the display special figure 2 stop type command for performing the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm are not set during the time shortening state (S1315 in FIG. 65 : Yes), the main display area Dm is in a state where it is not possible to execute the variable effect in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state".

In addition, in the situation of this timing 2, the player starts a right-handed game based on the performance hitting instruction, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. When the prize is won, the special symbol 2 is executing the variable display of "20 seconds" that started execution in the "normal game state". At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 cannot execute the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state".

In this way, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbols 1 and 2 as shown in FIG. 70, that is, the situation in which the variable display of the special symbol 2 that is not recommended in the "normal game state" is being executed. In the case of a state such as reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the variation in the third symbol display device 81 with the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment When the effect is executed, the variable display of the special symbol 2 immediately after the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" cannot perform an appropriate variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the "normal pattern low probability When the player immediately starts a right-handed game, the player wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a because the performance hitting instruction is executed immediately after the transition to the time shortening state. Even so, the third symbol display device 81 cannot execute the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" at the same time as winning a prize.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol 2 not recommended in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbols 1 and 2 as shown in FIG. 70, that is, the "normal game state" is performed. In the situation where it is being executed, in the case of a state such as reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 1 and moving to the "normal low probability time reduction state", in the variable display of the special symbol 1 of the "900th time" The executed ceiling reaching notification performance is not terminated at the end timing of the variable display of the special pattern 1 of the ``900th time'', but extended to the end timing of the variable display of the special pattern 2 being executed in parallel. (See FIGS. 74(a) to 75(a)), and after the end of the variable display of the special symbol 2, the effect hitting instruction is executed (see FIG. 75(b)).

By configuring in this way, the variable display of the special symbol 2 that is being executed at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the "normal pattern low It will be executed in the third symbol display device 81 from the variable display of the special symbol 2 whose execution is started after the transition to "probable time shortening state" (see FIG. 75(c)).

Also, at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", while the variable display of the special pattern 2 is being executed, the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed, and at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern 2 is completed After the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed, a hitting instruction for effect is displayed. Based on this display, the player starts the right-handed game, and the right-handed game causes the upper second start port 71 or the lower first opening. By winning the second starting port 71a, the variable display of the special symbol 2 can be immediately executed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

As a result, even when reaching the ceiling in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. In addition, the control contents of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the execution state of the variation display of the special symbols 1 and 2 as shown in FIG. 70 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72 .

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 70, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72, a detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 71, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 3rd embodiment is explained. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the third embodiment. The difference between the special figure 1 command process of the third embodiment and the special figure 1 command process of the second embodiment is that the extension process of the ceiling reaching notification effect is added.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the third embodiment, when the process of S1262 ends, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 2 is determined during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, and the ceiling reaching notification is determined by the determination result Execute ceiling reach notification extension processing to extend the performance execution time (S1281), terminate this special figure 1 command processing (S1203), and return to command determination processing (see FIG. 52).

Here, the ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281).

In this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281), during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect in the variable display of the special symbol 1 that will reach the ceiling, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 2 is determined, and the determination result is used. Extend the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect.

In this ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the third pattern display device 81 (S1551), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81. If not in execution (S1551: No), skip the processing of S1552 to S1554, terminate this ceiling reaching notification extension processing (S1281), and return to the special figure 1 command processing (see FIG. 71).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1551, when it is determined that the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling reaching notification effect (S1551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable effect of the special symbol 2 is being executed. Then (S1552), if the special symbol 2 variable effect is not being executed (S1552: No), there is no need to extend the ceiling reaching notification effect, so the processing of S1553 and S1554 is skipped, and this ceiling reaching notification extension is performed. End the processing (S1281), and return to the special figure 1 command processing (see FIG. 71).

As a result of the determination of S1552, if the variation production of the special symbol 2 is being executed (S1552: Yes), then the variation production of the special design 2 being executed is the variation of the special design 1 during execution of the ceiling reaching notification production It is determined whether or not to end after the presentation (S1553). As a result of determination, if the variation production of the special symbol 2 does not end after the variation production of the special symbol 1, that is, if the variation production of the special symbol 2 ends earlier than the variation production of the special symbol 1 (S1553: No ), since there is no need to extend the ceiling reaching notification effect, the process of S1554 is skipped, this ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 command process (see FIG. 71).

On the other hand, in the process of S1553, if it is determined that the fluctuation production of the special symbol 2 ends after the fluctuation production of the special symbol 1 (S1553: Yes), at the end timing of the ceiling reaching notification production by the fluctuation production of the special symbol 1 Since the variable performance of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification performance is extended until the end timing of the variation performance of the special symbol 2 (S1554), and this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281). , and returns to special figure 1 command processing (see FIG. 71).

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect executed in the third design display device 81 based on the variable display of the special design 1 at the time of transition to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state", special When the variable performance of the pattern 2 is also being executed and the variable performance of the special pattern 1 executing the ceiling reaching notification performance is finished first, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification performance is the special symbol 2. It can be extended until the end timing of the fluctuation production.

As a result, when the ceiling is reached in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. In the situation where the special pattern 1 is changed, even in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special pattern 1 and shifting to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'', the right-handed game is preferably played without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. can be started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, a description will be given of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment. FIGS. 73 to 75 show the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation.

Figure 73 (a) ~ Figure 73 (d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, during the execution of the second special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state", by the first special symbol variation effect It is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling, FIG. 73 (a) is the execution of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state". In the state where the number of times is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 73 (b), from the state of Figure 73 (a), reaches the ceiling only the fluctuation display of the first special design is finished, "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state" transitioned state FIG. 73(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 73(b). In (d), the effect hitting instruction is completed from the state of FIG. 73(c), and the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state.

FIGS. 74(a) to 75(c) show that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the execution of the second special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state", by the first special symbol variation effect It is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling, FIG. 74 (a) is the execution of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state". In the state where the number of times is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 74 (b), from the state of Figure 74 (a), reached the ceiling after only the first special symbol fluctuation display, "general pattern low probability time shortening state" transitioned state FIG. 74(c) and FIG. 74(d) show that the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously being executed from the state of FIG. 74(b), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is continuously executed, and FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. 74(d), FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 75(a), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state from the state of b) to which the instruction|indication of the hitting method for production|presentation was complete|finished and the variable display of the 2nd special design started execution.

FIG. 73(a) shows that in the "normal game state", when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is one more, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed in parallel. This shows a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 73(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 73(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is also being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, "0" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the two special symbols is "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that "1 time" is left until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, FIG. 73(a) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 73(b) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling from the state of FIG. ing. Also, FIG. 73(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 73(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 73(a) is finished, and "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 73(a). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, since the ceiling reaching notification effect is being performed, the effect is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The right hitting instruction 81d is not displayed. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol which was being executed in FIG. 73(a) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, FIG. 73(c) shows a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 73(b). Also, FIG. 73(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 73(c), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. 73(b) is not executed (stopped) as it is, "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. there is In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is still being executed from FIG. 73(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. The state that it is in the middle is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the ceiling reaching notification effect has ended, a character message 81e indicating that the ceiling has been reached, "play time entering", and a right hitting instruction 81d for effect suggesting a right hitting game and characters A message 81f is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 73(d), from the state of FIG. 73(c), the effect hitting instruction is completed, and the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It shows the running state. Also, FIG. 73(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 73(d), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. 73(b) is still unexecuted (stopped), "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. there is In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is still being executed from FIG. 73(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. The state that it is in the middle is displayed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the instruction for the effect hitting method is finished, and the variable display of the second special symbol recommended in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is executed.

Here, the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed in the state of FIG. 73(d) (see timing 4 in FIG. 70) is the variation display that started execution in the "normal game state". The special figure 2 variation pattern command for display and the special figure 2 stop type command for display for performing the variation production of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm are not set during the normal figure low probability time shortening state ( S1315 in FIG. 65: Yes), in the main display area Dm, it is in a state where it is not possible to execute the variable effect in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". Therefore, while the variable display of the second special symbol, which started to be executed in the "normal game state", is being executed, only the state in which the third symbol is varied is displayed in the main display area Dm.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the case of the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. In the display area Dm, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has shifted to the “normal figure low probability time shortened state”, and although it is possible to continue the game, for a while only a monotonous fluctuation effect is executed. It will be done, and there is a possibility that it will be awakened.

Next, FIGS. 74(a) to 75(c) show that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during execution of the second special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state", the first special symbol It is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variable effect, FIG. In a state where the number of display executions is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. is shown. FIG. 74(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 74(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is also being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, "0" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the two special symbols is "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that "1 time" is left until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, FIG. 74(a) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 74(b) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends first from the state of FIG. ing. Also, FIG. 74(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 74(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 74(a), is finished, and "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 74 (a). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, since the ceiling reaching notification effect is being performed, the effect is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The right hitting instruction 81d is not displayed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 74(a) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, in FIGS. 74(c) and 74(d), from the state of FIG. 74(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously being executed, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is continuously executed. This indicates that the 74(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. 70, and FIG. 74(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIGS. 74(c) and 74(d), the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. 74(b) is not yet executed (stopped), so the special figure 1 mini reel 81a has " 174” is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is still being executed from FIG. 74(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. The state that it is in the middle is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reaching notification effect is still being executed. Also, in FIGS. 74(c) and 74(d), the ceiling reach counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b) is deleted. In this way, when the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" and then disappears after a while. Interest can be heightened by the ceiling reach notification performance provided.

Next, FIG. 75(a) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. 74(d). FIG. 75(a) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. In FIG. 75(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. 74(b) is not executed (stopped) as it is, "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. there is Also, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, which was being executed in FIGS. 74(a) to (d), is completed, and "336" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reaching notification effect is still being executed.

Next, FIG. 75(b) shows a state in which the ceiling-reaching notification effect is finished and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 75(a). Also, FIG. 75(b) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. 70, which is the state immediately after FIG. 75(a). In FIG. 75(b), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. 74(b) is not executed (stopped) as it is, "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. there is In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol stopped in FIG. 75(a) is still unexecuted (stopped), "336" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the ceiling reaching notification effect has ended, a character message 81e indicating that the ceiling has been reached, "play time entering", and a right hitting instruction 81d for effect suggesting a right hitting game and characters A message 81f is displayed.

Next, FIG. 75(c) shows a state in which the performance hitting instruction is finished from the state of FIG. 75(b) and the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Also, FIG. 75(c) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. In FIG. 75(c), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. 74(b) is not executed (stopped) as it is, "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. there is In addition, in FIG. 75(b), the performance hitting instruction is executed, and the player starts a right-handed game, so that the ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the second Since the execution of the variable display of the special symbol has started, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed is displayed in the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b. Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol has started, the third symbol has started to vary.

As described above, the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 70, that is, the variable display of the second special symbol that is not recommended in the "normal game state" is being executed. In this situation, if the state is such that the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the first special symbol and the state shifts to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", the ceiling will be reached "900th" first The second special pattern which is being executed in parallel without ending the ceiling reaching notification effect executed in the variable display of the special pattern at the end timing of the "900th" first special pattern variable display. is extended until the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol, and after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect hitting instruction is executed.

By configuring in this way, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, instead the ceiling An arrival notification effect is executed. Then, at the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching notification effect is also completed, and then the performance hitting instruction is executed, so the player starts the right-handed game. Furthermore, by starting the right-handed game, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is won, and the second special symbol can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81. Become.

As a result, even when the ceiling is reached in the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. can.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to second embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "899 times" out of "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the "900th" first special symbol is displayed. In the dynamic display, an effect for informing that the ceiling is reached is performed, and the effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is finished at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time" is finished.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time", the waiting effect of reaching the ceiling and preparing for the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" , and the ceiling reaching standby effect ends at the end of either the end of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the end of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. is configured to Then, after the completion of the ceiling reaching standby performance, the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" can be immediately executed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to second embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment, the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the timing chart in the case of shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" will be described. do. In addition, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, and the normal The relationship between the process of variable display of symbols, the process of variable display of the first special symbol and the process of variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the normal electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65 will be described in the first embodiment. Since it is similar to the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 2 during the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment and transitioning to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". As shown in FIG. 76, the variation display of the special symbol 1 executes the variation display of the 898th and 899th rotations in the low probability state of the special symbol, and then, in the variation display of the scheduled 900th rotation, " 60 seconds” is executed (refer to timing 2 in FIG. 76).

Also, during the execution of the variable display of the 899th rotation of the special symbol 1, the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 for shooting the ball, and the ball is shot into the right-handed game area and shot in the right-handed game. The ball that has been drawn enters the upper second starting port 71. - 特許庁Then, based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71, a variable display of a small hit of "20 seconds" of the special symbol 2 is executed.

The variable display of this special symbol 2 is after the end of the 899th rotation of the variable display of the special symbol 1, and the execution ends after the start (during execution) of the variable display of the special symbol 1 that becomes a loss of "60 seconds". (see timing 3 in FIG. 76). In other words, the variable display of this special symbol 2 becomes the 900th rotation variable display in the low probability state of the special symbol, reaches the ceiling at the end of the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the "normal low probability time shortening state" transition to

Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 76, the right-handed game is started immediately after shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". That is, the player confirms the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display displayed at the time of transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", and starts the right-handed game. Then, the ball fired in the right-handed game wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is executed. On the other hand, at the time when the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "general figure low probability time shortening state" is started, the variable display that becomes a loss of "60 seconds" is still being executed in the special symbol 1 (Fig. See Timing 4 of 76).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is assumed that the variable display of each special symbol such as the timing chart shown in FIG. 76 is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the variable display of the "900th" special symbol 1 that reaches the ceiling, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. It is configured. In FIG. 76, since the variable display that becomes the loss of "60 seconds" of the special symbol 1 is the scheduled variable display of "900th time", in the variable display that becomes the loss of "60 seconds", the ceiling reaching notification A performance is performed.

Then, while the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the third pattern display device 81, the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special pattern 2, and the state shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (Fig. 76) See Timing 3). Furthermore, the player confirms the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 displayed at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" and starts the right-handed game, and the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port The variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed by winning the starting port 71a.

As described above, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the variable display that becomes the small hit of the special symbol 2 is configured so that the "non-reach" production mode of "2 seconds" is uniformly selected. For this reason (see FIGS. 12 to 16), the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed in quick succession by the right-handed game.

That is, when the third symbol display device 81 is executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the special symbol 1 "60 seconds" after reaching the ceiling and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" Although the variable display of the special symbol 2 recommended for the right-handed game is executed a plurality of times until the variable display of , the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable display of the special symbol 1. Based on this, the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed.

In this way, in the case of the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. second”), and during the execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2 and the transition to the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state” occurs, and the player can immediately When a right-handed game is started at 12:00, the 3rd pattern is displayed even though the recommended special pattern 2 is displayed in a ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' that can be in a ``renso'' state. In the device 81, the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed.

In this case, while the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling reaching notification effect, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started even though the player has started a right-handed game that can cause a "continuous" state. There is a possibility that it will not be done and it will be aroused.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is executed as shown in FIG. When starting, instead of the production notifying that the ceiling is reached, the standby production for reaching the ceiling and preparing for the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is executed, special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 End the standby effect at the end of the fluctuation display, notify that it has moved to the "normal low probability time reduction state", and immediately change the special symbol 2 in the "normal low probability time reduction state" It is configured so that it can be executed in the third pattern display device 81 .

By configuring in this way, even when the right-handed game is started immediately after the shift to the "normal low probability time shortening state", the fluctuation production of the special pattern 2 in the "normal low probability time shortening state" immediately can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, the interest of the player can be enhanced. It should be noted that the control contents of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 76 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 76, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1110) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the variation effect processing of the fourth embodiment and the variation effect processing of the second embodiment is that in the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling arrival notification processing for notifying that the ceiling has been reached is not performed, and the ceiling is reached. The point is that it has been changed to perform the ceiling arrival standby process, which is a preparation effect for moving to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state".

In the variation effect process (S1110) of the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1309 ends, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached, and depending on the determination result, the ceiling arrival standby process is executed to wait until the ceiling is reached (S1371). ), this variable effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 51).

Here, the ceiling reaching standby process (S1371) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reaching standby process (S1371).

In this ceiling arrival standby process (S1371), the number of rotations until reaching the ceiling is determined, and according to the determination result, the ceiling that executes the standby effect until it reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state" Set the arrival wait command.

In this ceiling reaching standby process (S1371), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is smaller than "899" (S1571). If so (S1571: Yes), the "900th" variation for executing the ceiling standby effect has not been reached, so the processing of S1572 to S1574 is skipped, and this ceiling arrival standby processing (S1371) is terminated. , returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, as a result of determination in S1571, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is not less than "899", that is, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is "899" or more (S1571: No), ceiling standby effect is reached, it is then determined whether or not the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1572), and if the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is not turned on ( S1572: No), since the ceiling standby effect has not been executed even once since the "900th" change for executing the ceiling standby effect has been reached, the ceiling reaching standby command is set (S1573), and the ceiling reaching notification has been completed. The flag 223m is set to ON (S1574), the ceiling reaching standby process (S1371) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 77).

Further, as a result of the process of S1572, if it is determined that the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1572: Yes), after reaching the "900th" change to execute the ceiling standby effect, even once Since the ceiling standby effect is being executed and there is no need to execute the ceiling standby effect, the processes of S1573 and S1574 are skipped, the ceiling reaching standby process (S1371) is terminated, and the variable effect process (Fig. 77 ).

By constructing in this way, the execution of the ceiling standby performance is limited to one time from the transition to the low probability state of the special pattern until reaching the ceiling and shifting to the ``normal low probability time shortening state''. can be done.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 79, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 4th embodiment is explained. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the special figure 1 command processing of the fourth embodiment and the special figure 1 command processing of the second embodiment is that at the time of receiving the special figure 1 confirmation command, it is determined whether the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, The point is that a process of ending the ceiling reaching standby effect and setting a ceiling effect start command according to the determination result is added.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1262 ends, it is determined whether or not the ceiling arrival standby effect executed in the above-described ceiling arrival standby process (see FIG. 78) is being executed. (S1291). As a result of the determination, if the ceiling reaching standby effect is not being executed (S1291: No), the processing of S1292 and S1293 is skipped, other corresponding processing is executed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) is executed. Terminates and returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in the process of S1291, if it is determined that the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed (S1291: Yes), the ceiling reaching standby effect is ended (S1292), the ceiling effect start command is set (S1293), This special figure 1 command processing (S1203) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 62 reference).

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 80, special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 4th embodiment is explained. Figure 80 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) of 4th execution form. The difference between the special figure 2 command processing of the fourth embodiment and the special figure 2 command processing of the second embodiment is that at the time of receiving the special figure 2 confirmation command, it is determined whether the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, The point is that a process of ending the ceiling reaching standby effect and setting a ceiling effect start command according to the determination result is added.

In the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) of the fourth embodiment, when the processing of S1272 ends, it is determined whether or not the ceiling reaching standby effect executed in the above-described ceiling reaching standby processing (see FIG. 78) is being executed. (S1295). As a result of the determination, if the ceiling reaching standby effect is not being executed (S1295: No), the processing of S1296 and S1297 is skipped, and other corresponding processing is executed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is executed. Terminates and returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in the process of S1295, if it is determined that the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed (S1295: Yes), the ceiling reaching standby effect is ended (S1296), the ceiling effect start command is set (S1297), This special figure 2 command processing (S1205) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 62 reference).

By configuring in this way, the ceiling reaching standby effect executed at the start of the variable display of the "900th" first special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is replaced by the movement of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. At the end of the execution of the target display, that is, at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", from the start of the dynamic display of the second special pattern executed after this, in the third design display device 81 A variable production can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 82, the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment will be described. Figures 81 to 82 show the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 81(a) shows the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". 81(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and FIG. 81(b) shows only the variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 81(a) is finished, and the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is reduced to one more time. FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the next variable display of the special symbol is started and the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, and FIG. 81(d) shows the variation of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which only the display ends, the ball reaches the ceiling, and the state shifts to the "low-probability time shortened state for normal patterns" and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display is displayed.

In addition, FIG. 82(a) shows that the ceiling arrival standby effect is completed from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which direction instructions are being executed, FIG. 82 (b) is from the state of FIG. is completed, and the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm during the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. There is, and FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 82(b).

FIG. 81(a) shows that in the "normal game state", when the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in parallel. It shows the state of being executed. FIG. 81(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 81(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is also being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, and the first special symbol is reserved It is displayed that the number is "1" and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed as the third symbol.

Next, in FIG. 81(b), only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. 81(a), and the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is reduced to one more time. state. Also, FIG. 81(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 81(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 81(a) is finished, and "517" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 81 (a). state. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 81(a) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, FIG. 81(c) shows a state in which execution of the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 81(b) and the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed. Also, FIG. 81(c) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. 76, which is the state immediately after FIG. 81(b). In FIG. 81(c), since the remaining one of the reserved number of variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. It is displayed, and it is displayed that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable display that has started to be executed in the state of "one time" until reaching the ceiling, that is, a variable display that will reach the ceiling by the end of the execution of the variable display. be. Therefore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, and the characters "waiting for play time" are displayed. Furthermore, the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 81(b) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 81 (d), from the state of FIG. 81 (c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first, reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" and main display It shows a state in which a right-hand hitting instruction 89 is displayed. Further, FIG. 81(d) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 81(d), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 81(c) is still being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. Further, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 81(c), is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, it is in the state of reaching the ceiling by the end of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". Therefore, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 82(a), from the state of FIG. 81(d), in the main display area Dm, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has shifted to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", and the production hitting method instruction is running. Also, FIG. 82(a) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. 76, which is the state immediately after FIG. 81(d). In FIG. 82(a), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 81(c) is still being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81e indicating that the ball has reached the ceiling is displayed, and a right-hand hitting instruction 81d and a text message 81f suggesting a right-hand hitting game are displayed.

Next, in FIG. 82(b), the transition notification from the state of FIG. , the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. Also, FIG. 82(b) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. 76, which is the state immediately after FIG. 82(a). In FIG. 82(b), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 81(c) is still being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the notification of the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" and the instruction for hitting for production are completed, and the third displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" The symbol shows a state of switching from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Next, FIG. 82(c) shows a state in which the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol has started from the state of FIG. 82(b). Also, FIG. 82(c) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 82(c), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 81(c) is still being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the right-handed game, and the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol has started is displayed, and simultaneously with the start of the right-handed game, the third symbol is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

As described above, in the case of the execution state of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. is dynamic display for a long time ("60 seconds"), and during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the ceiling In the dynamic display scheduled to be the "900th time" in the first special pattern, when the player immediately starts the right-handed game, the ceiling is reached. Execute a standby effect to prepare for the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state", end the standby effect at the end of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "normal low probability It is configured so that the third pattern display device 81 can immediately execute the variation performance of the second special symbol in the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' by notifying that it has shifted to the ``probable time shortening state''.

By configuring in this way, even when the right-handed game is started immediately after the transition to the "normal low probability time shortening state", the second special symbol immediately changes in the "normal low probability time shortening state". Since the effect can be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to second embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "899 times" out of "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the "900th" first special symbol is displayed. In the dynamic display, an effect for informing that the ceiling is reached is performed, and the effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is finished at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time" is finished.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the dynamic display of the "900th" first special symbol, a ceiling reaching notification effect is performed, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is a dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured to end when the display ends or when the dynamic display of the second special symbol for the jackpot starts.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first to second embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 83, the timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. In addition, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, and the normal The relationship between the process of variable display of symbols, the process of variable display of the first special symbol and the process of variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the normal electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65 will be described in the first embodiment. Since it is similar to the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 83 shows that during the "normal game state", the variable display of the special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal low probability time reduction state", but during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 1, the special It is a timing chart in the case of a big hit in the variation display of the symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 83, for the variable display of the special symbol 1, the variable display of the 899th rotation in the low probability state of the special symbol is executed, and then, in the variable display of the 900th rotation, the loss of "15 seconds" is performed. A variable display is executed (refer to timing 1 in FIG. 83).

Also, during the execution of the 900th rotation of the variable display of the special symbol 1, the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 for shooting the ball, and the ball is shot into the right-handed game area and shot in the right-handed game. The ball that has been drawn enters the upper second starting port 71. - 特許庁Then, based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71, the variable display of the special symbol 2 "70 seconds" is executed.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when it reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", it is configured so that the number of time reduction times of 1140 times is given. (See FIG. 25). In addition, when the jackpot type based on the variable display of the special symbol 2 is the jackpot type “time saving A”, 100 times of time saving is given (see FIG. 25).

That is, in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. At the end of , the ceiling is reached, and the number of time reductions of 1140 times is given by shifting to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", but immediately after reaching the ceiling, the jackpot type "time reduction Since the jackpot of A" is won, the number of times of shortening the working hours provided after the jackpot ends is 100 times.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is assumed that the variable display of each special symbol such as the timing chart shown in FIG. 83 is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the variable display of the "900th" special symbol 1 that reaches the ceiling, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. It is configured. Therefore, in the "900th" variable display of the special symbol 1, the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed, and at the same time when the "900th" variable display ends, the ceiling reaching notification effect also ends.

Therefore, when the player confirms the ceiling reaching notification effect executed in the variable display of the special symbol 1 of the "900th time", if the player knows the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling, 1140 times of time saving It will be recognized that the number of times is given. However, by winning the jackpot type ``time saving A'' in the variable display of the special pattern 2 that occurs immediately after this, the number of times of time saving that can be granted after the jackpot becomes 100 times, so the jackpot type ``time saving A'' was won. Although it is possible to obtain balls by doing so, some players may feel that the number of times they can be given has decreased significantly, and they may feel that their expectations for Renso have decreased, and they may be aroused. be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. is being executed, when the variable display of the special pattern 2 wins a jackpot, at the same time as the variable display of the special pattern 2 is started, the ceiling reaching notification performance is interrupted, and the big win is notified in the variable display of the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加is configured to

By configuring in this way, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification performance is reduced, the time for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced, and the big win in the variable display of the special pattern 2 can be notified earlier. can. In addition, the ceiling reaching notification performance is not continued until the end of the variable performance of the special symbol 1, but is interrupted in the middle, so that the player can recognize that some other event has occurred while reaching the ceiling. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling has decreased to 100 times of time saving times given based on the jackpot type "time saving A". can be mitigated. In addition, the details of the control contents of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 83 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 83, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, a detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1110) of the fifth embodiment. The difference between the variation production process of the fifth embodiment and the variation production process of the second embodiment is that at the start of the variation production of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the propriety of the variation production of the second special symbol Also, a process of determining whether or not the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed and switching the ceiling reaching notification effect according to the determination result is added.

In the variation effect process (S1110) of the fifth embodiment, in the process of S1315, when it is determined that it is "normal game state" (S1315: Yes), the propriety of the second special symbol variation effect and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed, and depending on the determination result, a ceiling reaching effect switching process for switching the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed (S1391), this variable effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the main process (Fig. 51 ).

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391).

In this ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391), it is determined whether or not the variation effect of the second special symbol is appropriate and whether the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed or not, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is switched according to the determination result.

In this ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol has won the jackpot (S1591), and if the variation display of the second special symbol has won the jackpot. If (S1591: No), the processing of S1592 and S1593 is skipped, the ceiling reaching effect switching processing (S1391) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1591, if the variation display of the second special symbol wins the jackpot (S1591: Yes), then whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling reaching notification effect is determined (S1592), and if the ceiling reaching notification effect is not being executed in the third pattern display device 81 (S1592: No), the process of S1593 is skipped, and the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) ends. Then, the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 84).

Further, as a result of the determination in S1592, when the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (S1592: Yes), the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted, and the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit. A ceiling reaching effect switching command for notifying that the game has been won is set (S1593), the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 84).

By configuring in this way, when the variable display of the second special pattern wins the jackpot during execution of the ceiling arrival notification performance in the third pattern display device 81, the ceiling arrival notification performance is interrupted and the second special It is possible to notify that a big win has been won in the variable display of the symbols. As a result, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect is reduced, and the time for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced. In addition, the ceiling reaching notification performance is not continued until the end of the variable performance of the special symbol 1, but is interrupted in the middle, so that the player can recognize that some other event has occurred while reaching the ceiling. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling has decreased to 100 times of time saving times given based on the jackpot type "time saving A". can be mitigated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment will be described. Figures 86 and 87 show the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 86(a) shows the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is one more time in the "normal game state". 86(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and FIG. 86(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol starts from the state of FIG. 86(a). 86(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed, and FIG. 86(c) shows a variable display of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 86(b). It is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect has been started and interrupted, and FIG. 86(d) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol jackpot has stopped from the state of FIG. 86(c). It is a diagram showing.

In addition, FIG. 87(a) shows the execution of the variable display of special symbols in the "universal pattern high probability time reduction state" that has shifted from the state of FIG. FIG. 87(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of times is 99, and FIG. 87(b) shows that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped from the state of FIG. FIG. 87(c) shows a state in which the state has shifted to the "normal game state". It is the figure which showed the state switched from the special design to the 1st special design.

FIG. 86(a) shows that in the "normal game state", when the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both performed. It shows a state of being stopped. FIG. 86(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 86(a), the variable display of the first special symbol has just stopped, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left portion of the main display area Dm. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "193" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations of each of the 2 special symbols is "1" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that "1 time" is left until the ceiling is reached.

Next, FIG. 86(b) shows a state in which variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 86(a), and ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed. Also, FIG. 86(b) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. 83, which is the state immediately after FIG. 86(a). In FIG. 86(b), since the remaining one of the reserved number of variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. It is displayed, and it is displayed that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, FIG. 86(b) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in FIG. 86(b), similarly to FIG. 86(a), the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), so "193" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. It is

Next, FIG. 86(c) shows a state in which variable display for winning the second special symbol jackpot is started from the state of FIG. 86(b), and ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted. Also, FIG. 86(c) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 86(c), the execution is started in FIG. 86(b), and the variable display of the first special symbol that was executing the ceiling reaching notification effect is being continued, and in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a, A state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, FIG. 86(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, since the second special symbol is a big hit variable display, in the central part of the main display area Dm, based on the start of the big hit variable display of the second special symbol, in FIG. The started ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted by the screen darkening effect.

Next, FIG. 86(d) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol jackpot is stopped from the state of FIG. 86(c). Also, FIG. 86(d) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 86(d), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that started in FIG. 86(b) has been completed, and "562" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, since the ceiling is reached by the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the state is shifted to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the main display right hitting instruction 89 is displayed. . Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol jackpot, which started to be executed in FIG. 86(c), is finished, and "666" is displayed in the center of the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b and the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 87(a) shows the execution of the variable display of special symbols in the "general figure high probability time reduction state" shifted from the state of FIG. A state in which the number of times is 99 is shown. Figure 87(a) shifts to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" by the fluctuation display that becomes the second special symbol jackpot that started execution in the state of Fig. 86(c), and the "general pattern high probability time Since the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed 99 times in the "shortened state", the time saving counter 81g in the upper left part of the main display area Dm indicates that the number of remaining time saving times is "1 time". display is taking place. In addition, since the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, "145" is displayed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed ( is stopped) is displayed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. It is In addition, "0" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the two special symbols is "0" and "4". Furthermore, since it is in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" in which a right-handed game is performed, a right-handed instruction 89 for main display and a character message 81f are displayed.

Next, FIG. 87(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped from the state of FIG. 87(a), the time-saving end condition is established, and the state shifts to the "normal game state". In FIG. 87(b), since the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 100th execution in the "general figure high probability time shortening state", has ended, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, the special figure 2 mini reel 81b shows "582". In addition, due to the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the "normal game state". 0 times” is displayed, and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for main display and the character message 81f that were displayed in FIG. 87(a) are erased.

Next, FIG. 87(c) shows a state in which the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 87(b). there is In FIG. 87(c), since the "normal game high probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is performed has shifted to the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, the left-handed instruction for production 81h is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Further, the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is the first special symbol, and in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, the first special symbol is dynamically displayed. A state in which the corresponding variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the variable display of the special symbol 1 at the "900th time" in the low probability state of the special symbol, during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, the special symbol 2 When the variable display wins a jackpot, the ceiling reaching notification performance is interrupted at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern 2 is started, and the big win is notified in the variable display of the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification performance is reduced, the time for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced, and the big win in the variable display of the special pattern 2 can be notified earlier. can. In addition, the ceiling reaching notification performance is not continued until the end of the variable performance of the special symbol 1, but is interrupted in the middle, so that the player can recognize that some other event has occurred while reaching the ceiling. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling has decreased to 100 times of time saving times given based on the jackpot type "time saving A". can be mitigated. Furthermore, when the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed as a rare case when reaching the ceiling, the ceiling reaching notification performance is immediately ended, and the performance contents are consistent, so that there is no discrepancy in the performance contents. By configuring as above, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to second embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball can enter or is likely to enter the first start hole 64, while the upper second start hole 71 or the lower second start hole It is configured so that the ball is difficult or not to enter the starting port 71a, and in the left-handed game, a second special Dynamic display of symbols is configured to be difficult or impossible to implement. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments, the opening time of the normal electric role 72 when winning the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is short (ie, "0.1 second ”), and is configured to make it difficult to enter the lower second starting port 71a.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the normal electric player 72b is arranged below the first start port 64, and in the left-handed game, the normal electric player 72b is in an open state. It is configured to be able to win a prize through the lower second starting port 71a. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the opening time of the normal electric combination 72b when winning the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is longer than the opening time of the normal electric combination 72 in the first embodiment. It is a long time (that is, "1.0 second"), and is configured to be able to win to the lower second start port 71a even in the "normal game state" in which a left-handed game is played.

The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 88, a specific configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the game board 13 of the first to fifth embodiments and the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment is that an ordinary electric player 72b that can win a prize in the lower second start port 71a by being in an open state is located below the first starting port 64 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, below the first starting hole 64, there is arranged a lower second starting hole 71a through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric machine 72b is in an open state. . To this lower second starting port 71a, when the normal electric role 72b is in the open state in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, about two balls per minute are fired in the left-handed game. Amusement nails are planted in the periphery so as to win prizes. The lower second starting hole 71a also serves as one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

Below the first starting port 64 in front view, the lower second starting port 71a is opened by opening and closing two blade members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the lower second starting port 71a. A common electric actuator 72b is provided that can be displaced to a (expanded state) or a closed state (reduced state). The normal electric terminal 72b is normally in a closed state with the blades closed (the blades stand up), and the ball cannot enter the lower second starting port 71a or is difficult to enter. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the normal electric part 72b is operated for a predetermined time. From the state in which the blades of the normal electrode 72b stand up while the normal electrode 72b is being operated. It will be in a state of being movable in a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), and the ordinary electric terminal 72b will be in an open state. When the normal electric switch 72b is in the open state, the ball can enter the lower second starting port 71a, or the ball can enter the ball more easily than in the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" stops and hits, and when the normal electric part 72b is in an open state, not only the ball entering the first starting port 64 , a ball can be entered into the lower second starting port 71a, and a state in which a lot of big winning lotteries can be performed can be achieved.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbols in the low probability state of the normal symbols is 70/100 (see FIG. 89), and the winning probability is 70/100 in the variable display of the normal symbols. It is set so that it can be easily derived. Furthermore, the opening time of the normal electric combination 72b when the normal symbol is won in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "1.0 second" (see FIG. 89), and in the "normal game state", it is fired by the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball can enter the lower second starting port 71a.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed based on the winning to the first start port 64, and the lower second start It is configured so that both dynamic display of the second special symbol executed based on the winning to the mouth 71a can be executed.

Therefore, as described above in the first to fifth embodiments, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling (FIGS. 19, 70, 76 and FIG. 83), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the "normal game state" is the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. is likely to occur even when a normal game is played, and as a result, when a non-recommended right-handed game is performed just before reaching the ceiling like the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments From such a rare case, the control contents of the variation effect of each dynamic display and the direction of hitting for effect, which are executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling, are likely to function more effectively.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c), the details of the normal pattern per random number table 202h, the normal pattern variation table 202i, and the normal pattern opening table 202j of the sixth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202h per general pattern stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment, which is stored in the ROM 202 of the first embodiment. Since it is the same as the random number table 202h per normal figure, the description is omitted.

Then, FIG. 89 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal figure variation table 202i stored in the ROM202 of the sixth embodiment, which is stored in the ROM202 of the first embodiment. Since it is the same as the normal pattern fluctuation table 202i, the explanation is omitted.

Next, FIG. 89(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal electric open table 202j stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the normal electric role opening table 202j of the sixth embodiment and the normal electric role opening table 202j of the first embodiment is that the opening times of the normal electric role 72 and the normal electric role 72b in the normal symbol low probability state are different. It is a point.

The normal electric role opening table 202j of the sixth embodiment is referred to when the normal symbol wins, and based on the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol win occurs, the opening (immersion) time and the number of openings of the normal electric role 72b are determined. stipulated.

The ordinary electric role opening table 202j of the sixth embodiment is divided into groups based on the gaming state in which the ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, for "normal game state / latent probability change state" referred to in "normal game state" and "latency probability change state", "probability change state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or The open state (open time) of the normal electric worker 72b is changed for "probability fluctuation state/low probability time shortening state/time shortening state" referred to in "general map high probability time shortening state".

As shown in FIG. 89(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric combination 72b set when the normal symbol is won is released. The number of times is 1, and the opening time is defined as "1.0 second" in the normal electric service opening table 202j. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric role 72b is opened for "1.0 seconds" x 1 time = "1.0 seconds". is set to be

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the opening time of the normal electric role 72b set when winning the normal symbol is "5. 8 seconds” and the number of times of opening is set to 1 in the normal electric service opening table 202j. That is, when the normal pattern is elected in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state" or "normal high probability time reduction state", the normal electric role 72b is "5.8 seconds" × It is configured to be opened once=“5.8 seconds”.

As a result, by changing the open mode of the normal electric part 72b according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric part 72b is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the period during which the normal electric terminal 72b is open is long, so that it is easy to enter the lower second start opening 71a, or the normal electric terminal 72b is open. By making the state in which the ball can enter the lower second starting port 71a different depending on the game state, different game characteristics can be produced for each game state.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it becomes a high probability state of normal patterns, the variable display time is short, normal electric The opening period of the winning combination 72b is lengthened, and the balls launched in the right-handed game are configured to easily enter the lower second start hole 71a.

In addition, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is recommended, although it is a state with a low probability of normal symbols, it is set so that a certain degree (70/100) is likely to be derived. Since the opening period of is set to a certain degree ("1.0 seconds"), it is configured so that the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter the lower second start port 71a.

Therefore, the ball hit to the right in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" and "normal high probability time shortening state" easily enters the lower second start port 71a, and the second special Since the number of reserved balls for dynamic display of symbols is likely to accumulate, the variation reduction function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be efficiently executed.

In addition, the ball hit to the left in the "normal game state" can win the first starting port 64 and the lower second starting port 71a (about 6 and about 2 wins per minute, respectively). , both dynamic display of the first special symbol and dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Therefore, as described above in the first to fifth embodiments, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling (FIGS. 19, 70, 76 and FIG. 83), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the "normal game state" is the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the dynamic display variation effect and the effect shot executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling The control content of the direction instruction tends to function more effectively.

In addition, the hit probability of variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more likely to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state", etc., any ratio may be used. The probability may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the low probability state of the normal pattern It may be configured so as not to win a prize at the time. Also, if the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state", it may be any time, for example, the variable display time of normal symbols in the "normal game state" is "30 seconds" or more. may be a long time (for example, "100 seconds") or a short time (for example, "1 second") less than "10 seconds".

Moreover, the open time and the number of open times of the ordinary electric circuit 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the open time of the normal electric combination 72, any open time may be used as long as it is more advantageous for the player to be in the "variable probability state" than in the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "1 second" or more (for example, "5 seconds"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ”). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "variable probability state" or the like may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds". (eg, “1 second”). Further, the number of opening times of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a number greater than "1 time" (for example, "5 times").

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, below the first starting hole 64, there is a lower second starting hole into which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric machine 72b is in the open state. 71a is provided. In addition, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is 70/100 (see FIG. 89), and is set so that the winning is easily derived in the variable display of the normal symbol, and the low probability of the normal symbol. In the state, the opening time of the normal electric combination 72b when the normal symbol is won is "1.0 second". Therefore, in the "normal game state", it is configured so that the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter the lower second start port 71a. As a result, the ball hit to the left in the "normal game state" can win the first starting hole 64 and the lower second starting hole 71a (about 6 balls and about 2 balls per minute, respectively). , both the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Therefore, as described above in the first to fifth embodiments, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling (FIGS. 19, 70, 76 and FIG. 83), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the "normal game state" is the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the dynamic display variation effect and the effect shot executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling The control content of the direction instruction tends to function more effectively.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same effects as those in the first to fifth embodiments due to the same configuration.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, the upper second start opening 71, the lower second start opening 71a, and the variable winning device 65 are placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as the winning openings into which the ball fired in the right-handed game can win. are placed in On the other hand, in a game state in which a right-handed game is played by arranging a general prize-winning port 63 on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front as a prize-winning port into which a ball fired in a right-handed game can be won. The general winning opening 63 is configured so that a certain amount of balls (for example, 10 out of 100) can be won, and in the right-handed game, the upper second starting opening 71, the lower second starting opening 71a, or the variable winning device 65 In addition, it is constructed so that prize balls can be paid out to the players. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while suppressing the consumption of the player's own balls during a right-handed game. In particular, it is possible to reduce the consumption of balls owned by the player by paying out prize balls based on winning to the general prize winning opening 63 in the "latency probability fluctuation state" in which the prize winning assisting function does not operate.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, when one of the first special symbols or the second special symbols is dynamically displayed as a jackpot, the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or the first special symbol starts execution, The lottery for dynamic display of the second special symbol or the first special symbol on the other hand is constructed so as to draw lots only from random numbers other than big wins (that is, random numbers that result in a loss). On the other hand, when the dynamic display of one of the first special symbols or the second special symbol is a big hit, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or the first special symbol starts to be executed, the other The dynamic display of the second special symbol or the first special symbol may also be configured so that the jackpot can be won. In this case, when a big win is won by the dynamic display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the loss of one special symbol, the variation of the dynamic display of the loss is temporarily stopped at the end of the variable display of the big win. , it may be configured to restart the variable display of the loss at the end of the jackpot game.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the "probability fluctuation state" can occur by using the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, a variable winning device for a small winning is provided so that a small winning can be won in the first special pattern and the second special pattern in addition to the big winning, and is opened based on the winning of the small winning game. Then, a pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed Machine) is used, and it is configured to vary whether or not the "time saving function" is given according to the number of times the "time saving function" is given. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game to which the "time saving function" is provided, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described embodiment, the end condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to be ended by the number of times dynamic display of special symbols is executed (so-called ST type) or winning the next big hit (so-called loop type). is doing. On the other hand, even if a pachinko machine (so-called falling type) is used in which the "probability fluctuation state" ends (so-called falling function) when a predetermined lottery result other than a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of special symbols. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games. In this case, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" (for example, the first game state), the fall lottery (for example, non-derivation transition means) corresponds to the "time reduction state" or "normal game state ” (for example, the second game state), it does not immediately transition to the ``time reduction state'' or ``normal game state'' production, but the ``probability fluctuation state'' or ``latency probability fluctuation state''. continues the production (for example, the first production) (for example, production continuation means). Then, when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the "time saving function" ends, or when winning a lottery for changing the effect, etc.), a screen corresponding to the "time reduction state" or "normal game state" (for example, the second effect) is executed. configured to By constructing in this way, even if the falling lottery is applied in the "variable probability state" or the "variable latent probability state", it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the player has fallen, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can clearly recognize the game state (game result), and the game specifications and effects that are easy for the player to understand are executed. can be done. In addition, in the "variable probability state" or the "variable latent probability state", if the falling lottery is applied, an effect that can suggest that fact to the player may be executed.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol is generated by selecting the jackpot type to which the "probability variation function" is provided. On the other hand, it may be configured to provide a so-called probability limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a "variable probability function" is selected for each given number of times of a predetermined "variable probability function". Also, it may be configured to provide a so-called time-saving limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a high-probability state of normal symbols is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress continuous excessive game values to be given to the player, and to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described embodiment, the normal electronic part 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of the normal symbol or the special symbol. On the other hand, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage opening for opening a movable accessory (so-called non-motorized accessory) blocking another winning opening by passing a ball may be used.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a game state in which the "time saving function" is provided after the jackpot ends is generated. On the other hand, when a predetermined pattern (for example, a time-saving pattern) other than a jackpot (small hit) is derived in the dynamic display of special patterns, the transition to a state in which the "time-saving function" is given without going through the jackpot It may be configured to By configuring in this way, during the dynamic display of one special pattern, the phenomenon of reaching the ceiling based on the dynamic display of the other special pattern, which is easily executed by the "time saving function", can occur. While enriching the variations to which the "function" is given, the performance playing instruction is displayed at the timing when the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is completed. A player can start a right-handed game without a sense of incongruity.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, "1000 times") without winning the jackpot. ) is configured to give a “time-saving function” (so-called ceiling function) without going through the jackpot when executed. On the other hand, the predetermined number of times may be counted separately for the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, the predetermined number of times may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed concurrently. On the other hand, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation), and each dynamic display is controlled. good too. Specifically, during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (for example, the game result suggestive effect), when the execution opportunity of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (for example, the specific effect) is obtained, The start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be suspended during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Also, the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Specifically, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol suggesting the presence or absence of the occurrence of the jackpot game (for example, suggesting the game result), the dynamic display of the second special symbol suggesting the presence or absence of the occurrence of the jackpot game ( For example, the dynamic display of the first special pattern is continued (for example, a continuation means) even when the execution opportunity (for example, occurrence condition) of the specific effect) is obtained, and the dynamic display of the first special pattern is executed. In the middle, the start of the dynamic display of the second special design is suspended (for example, specific effect waiting means), and when the dynamic display of the first special design is completed, the suspended second special symbol is dynamic It may be configured to start display (for example, specific effect executing means). In this case, it is configured to display a pending display (for example, related effects) indicating that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended (for example, related effects executing means). Furthermore, dynamic display may be performed in order of winning (so-called winning order variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games. In addition, when executing the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special design or the first special design that has been reserved, the corresponding reserved design is continuously displayed as the execution reserved design in the third design display device 81. Continue to continue (for example, related continuation means), at the end of the variable production, or at an appropriate timing of the variable production (for example, at the start of the variable element of "super reach"), etc. So as to erase the execution suspension design may be configured.

<Modification 10>
In the above-described embodiment, as the end condition of the "time saving function", it is configured to end based on a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of special symbols or winning a jackpot. On the other hand, the "time saving function" may be terminated based on the number of winnings to the small winning game or the derivation of the time saving ending pattern different from the big winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the end condition of the prize assisting state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game. Also, when the "time saving function" is effective, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is a predetermined number (for example, a reserved full tank (i.e., 4 pieces), or a fixed number of reserved balls for a reserved full tank (for example, 2 pieces) ) It may be configured to end the “time saving function” when it is stored.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, the value of the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated at the end of dynamic display of each special symbol in the "normal game state". . On the other hand, it may be configured to be updated at the start of execution of dynamic display of each special symbol.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, the variation pattern that can be selected when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" is configured so that various variation times can be selected, similar to the variation pattern that can be selected before reaching the ceiling. . On the other hand, it may be configured such that the variation pattern that can be selected when reaching the ceiling is constant. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time at the time of reaching the ceiling is fixed, and the ceiling reaching notification effect can be executed in a fixed time. In addition, as in the case of reaching the ceiling by the dynamic display of the second special symbol while executing the loss or small hit fluctuation that takes a long time in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ceiling is reached. First, it is possible to avoid a state in which the third symbol display device 81 continues to perform the variation effect of the first special symbol over a long period of time.

<Modification 13>
In the above-described embodiment, it is constructed so that the winning is 70/100 in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal electric combination 72 can be moved. On the other hand, it may be constructed so that winning is not won in the low-probability state of normal symbols, but winning is only in the high-probability state of normal symbols (for example, 100% winning). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the lower second start opening 71a due to the movement of the normal electric combination 72 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to reliably realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is opened in the jackpot game. On the other hand, a plurality of winning openings that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided, and the plurality of winning openings may be opened according to the type of big winning or the type of small winning. By configuring in this way, by opening the other variable winning device immediately after closing one of the variable winning devices, the interval time can be reduced as much as possible to contribute to the shortening of the jackpot game time.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, one type of variable display time of normal symbols is provided according to the game state. On the other hand, the variable display time of normal symbols may be selected by lottery from a plurality of types of variable display times according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the variable display time of normal symbols is determined by lottery from "1 second", "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "30 seconds". do. By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged, the right-handed game is played and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to perform variable display of the normal symbol, and according to the derivation timing. Even if the ball is shot toward the ordinary electric terminal 72 that can be opened by pressing, the opening timing of the lower second start port 71a becomes plural, so that the prize winning to the lower second start port 71a can be suppressed. can.

<Modification 16>
In the above embodiment, in the lottery for the first special pattern, a winning combination is selected from among the big win (, small win) or loss, and in the lottery for the second special pattern, the winning combination is selected from among the big win (, small win) or loss. It is configured to select roles. On the other hand, a small win may be provided only in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a winning combination may be selected from among the big win, the small win or the loss, or only in the lottery of the second special symbol. may be provided, and a winning combination may be selected from a big hit, a small win, or a loss, or a winning combination may be selected from a big win or a loss without providing a small win in any special pattern lottery. Alternatively, a small win may be provided in any special symbol lottery, and a winning combination may be selected from among the big win, small win, or loss.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the game state is changed (for example, from "probability fluctuation state" to "normal game state") according to the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. ing. On the other hand, it is possible to change the game state according to the number of executions of a predetermined effect other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, "ready-to-win display" or a specific effect based on winning a specific role). may be configured.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls is counted for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation time and reach probability of each special symbol are changed for each number of reserved balls. On the other hand, it may be configured to change the variation time and the reach probability of each special symbol according to the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, the ceiling reaching notification production is configured to be performed by the fluctuation production of the special symbol one time before that can reach the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". On the other hand, the ceiling reaching notification production is continuously executed over the variable production of a plurality of special symbols from the fluctuation production of the special pattern before multiple times that can reach the "normal figure low probability time reduction state". can be configured to

In the above-described embodiment, the small winning type of the small winning game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the small winning type of the small winning game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are each composed of one type. . Instead of this, it is configured to provide a plurality of types of small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the first special symbol and / and small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may Furthermore, it may be configured to vary whether or not to end the "time saving function" according to the small hit type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the above-described embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged for each game state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged is executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Instead of this, it may be constructed such that the non-recommended special symbol variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in a predetermined manner. Specifically, for example, to make the variation effect of the encouraged special symbols stand out in the main display area Dm (the central part, most, the area larger than the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged, and the pattern display mode to be darkened Execution, etc.), while executing the fluctuation effect of the special pattern that is not encouraged in the main display area Dm, so as not to stand out from the fluctuation effect of the special pattern that is encouraged (corner, small part, special pattern that is encouraged) A smaller area than the variable effect, the pattern display mode is thin, etc.) is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the execution mode of the variable effect of a plurality of special symbols by the third symbol display device 81 .

In the above-described embodiment, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of balls for which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is configured so that the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the second special symbol affects the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to affect only Instead of this, the number of pending balls dynamically displayed for one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time for dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to change accordingly. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the second special symbol are mixed, a unique variation time can be selected. By configuring, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. is not limited to six stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the big hit probability is changed by changing the probability set value has been described, but the normal symbol winning probability and the small winning winning probability may be changed.

Also, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" is set. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before judging whether or not the RAM judgment value is normal, it is judged whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is forcibly executed. to change the probability set value to the person concerned with the hall, urge the person concerned with the hall etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or set a specific probability within the normal range as the probability set value. The setting value may be set compulsorily.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed using the setting key 501 . Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, It may be possible to operate it by hall personnel or the like without opening the substrate box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 . Further, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main controller 110 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the probability of a big win or the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) It is possible to change the setting regarding the degree of advantage to the player in multiple stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

In the above embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the losing random numbers are set to continuous values, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit is determined by a range (for example, "0" or more "49" or less), and the control load of the main controller 110 is reduced. On the other hand, the random numbers (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers) that give the game value may be arranged not in a continuous manner but in a dispersed (dissipated) manner. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", the jackpot random number is set to "7,341,555,777,831" and the small hit random number is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low-probability state and the high-probability state) continuously, It is possible that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the likelihood of fraudulently being awarded a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number to which a game value is assigned from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap each other. You may set a jackpot random value. By configuring in this way, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot. can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc. by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random numbers may be configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and to improve the security performance.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot random number increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from setting values "1" to "3", the jackpot random number value is increased by "2", while from setting values "4" to "6", the jackpot random number value is "5". increase by increments. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be imparted by the setting difference can be greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with modulation due to the setting difference, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to change the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small hit type is changed. It may be configured such that a setting difference is caused by the change.

In the above-described embodiment, the random number that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number) is changed in accordance with the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated for by the random number that does not give the game value (that is, the random number that does not give the game value). It was configured as On the other hand, when the random number that gives the game value (for example, the big hit random number) is changed due to the setting change, the changed amount of the random number that gives the other game value (for example, the small hit random number) ) may be configured to be compensated from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game value that can be imparted with a difference for each setting, provide a game with a sharpness for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot random number range")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "the range of the random number values that fail." Here, as the "re-jackpot random number range", the increase in the jackpot random number value associated with the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increment of the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number value), and according to the setting change It is possible to fix the range of the random numbers that are not changed (that is, the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers that do not change even when the settings are changed). As a result, for example, in the success/failure determination control program, the basic success/failure determination of fixed random numbers is made common to all set values, and the increment of the jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. can be determined, the design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of man-hours for development can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, each random number may be defined (set) in the order of the number of random numbers (or the order of the number of random numbers).

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, the "range of random numbers for big hits" that increases with the change of settings is set so that it is adjacent to the random number that decreases with changes of settings (i.e., the "range of random numbers that lose"). It may be configured to be defined (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range", and "losing random number range". . By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). The range of random numbers that are not changed (that is, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for judging whether or not the small hit is correct, while making the judgment of the small hit random value common to all set values, the increment of the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value This facilitates control program design and reduces development man-hours.

In the above-described embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning a special symbol is improved (doubled or more). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", it may be configured to improve the small winning probability of the special symbols. Further, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase of the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 2 times or more (for example, 10 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", both the jackpot probability and the small win probability are improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times, and the small win probability is also 5 times). good.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol and the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol are configured to be equal. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured. The probability may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol.

In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbol, it is configured such that the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state). You may

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for by the losing random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increment of the jackpot random number value may be compensated for by the small hit random number and the losing random number value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of big hit random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random numbers and the losing random numbers, and the change in the big hit random numbers is fixed. It is no longer necessary to supplement from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from 1 for the amount of change in the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the normal electric element 72 is provided for the lower second starting port 71a, and the manner in which the ball flows into the lower second starting port 71a differs depending on the opening/closing state of the normal electric member 72. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, a normal electric motor 72 is provided for the upper second starting port 71, and the manner of inflow of the ball into the upper second starting port 71 is different depending on the opening/closing state of the normal electric motor 72. Alternatively, an ordinary electric motor 72 may be provided for the first starting port 64, and the manner of inflow of the ball into the first starting port 64 may differ depending on the opening/closing state of the ordinary electric motor 72. You may

In the above embodiment, the normal electric element 72 that displaces between the protruding state and the immersed state is used, and the immersion timing and immersion time of the normal electric element 72 are changed in each game state, thereby realizing the game characteristics of the present invention. is configured to On the other hand, the playability of the present invention may be realized by using rotary blade members and changing the operating timing and operating time of the blade members for each game state. Specifically, for example, the blade members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower second starting port 71a, and when the blade members are in a non-operating state (for example, an upright state), the balls are positioned outside the blade members (non-rolling side). , and flow downstream as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member rotates (from the upright state to the rightward tilted state of 120 degrees), the ball collides with the inner side (rolling side) of the blade member, and moves the inner side of the blade member to the lower second starting port. It is configured to roll toward the 71a side. With this configuration, it is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates has been largely driven in the rotational mode of the blade member compared to the drive mode in which the normal electric element 72 appears and disappears. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize whether or not the prize has been won by the variable display.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is produced in the main display area Dm. It may be configured to change accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol being executed in the main display area Dm, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 that are being executed are positioned above, displayed in Arabic numerals, or displayed in red. , and the fourth pattern display areas 88 and 87 that are not executed are positioned on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a color different from red ( For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). By constructing in this way, while distinguishing and displaying the variable performance being executed, it is constituted so that it is difficult to recognize which special symbol is being executed, and the player recognizes the game state in which he is currently staying. By constructing the game machine so that it is difficult to do so, it is possible to create a game feature of guessing the game state and improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, it is configured to output an alarm sound not only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state in which a left-handed game is recommended, but also when a specific condition is satisfied. good too. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for actions of a malicious player who intentionally tries to obtain more balls than the game specification, and an inexperienced player can By not outputting an alarm sound for a right-handed game with good intentions due to an operation mistake, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games and suppress the player's desire to play, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The winning probability of normal symbols may be configured to be about the same in any game state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" where the special symbol jackpot probability is low, the normal symbol hit probability is set to 50/100, and the special symbol jackpot probability is In the high "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 50/100 or 51/100, etc., so that it is the same or equivalent to the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the "normal game state" etc. configured to By configuring in this way, regarding the opening of the normal electric combination 72 based on the winning of the normal design, the variable display time of the normal design and the opening time of the normal construction 72 are considered, and the probability of winning the normal design is not considered. Since it is possible to calculate the ball payout rate, etc., it becomes possible to simplify the design of the game specifications in each game state.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbols to be selected after the big win may be different for each big win symbol. Specifically, for example, if one of the jackpot symbols 1, 3, 5, and 7 that can cause the "probability fluctuation state" wins in one pattern, the first pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" Both the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to shift to a "both long variation probability variation state" in which relatively long variation time is likely to be selected. Also, when winning with 3 symbols, while the first special symbol tends to be selected for a relatively long variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time. 1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, when winning with 5 symbols, in the "probability fluctuation state", both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are shifted to a "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which relatively short fluctuation times are likely to be selected. configured to In addition, when winning with 7 symbols, while the first special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively long variation time. special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the special symbols that can be derived first in the game state after the big win depending on the type of the big win symbols, for example, which special symbol will stop first or not. Therefore, the probability that the big win appears first can be varied for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may differ based on the number of variations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation performance of the special symbols for the 1st time to the 10th time after the end of the big win is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time can be easily selected, and the 11th time and after. As for the variation performance of the special symbol, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time is easily selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game while providing sharpness to the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A plurality of types of winning types of normal symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, a one-time opening hit in which the normal electric terminal 72 is opened once, a three-time opening hit in which the hive plate 72a is opened three times, and an ordinary electric terminal 72 that is opened three times for a long time. 3 long open hits are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, it is advantageous for the player in the order of "normal game state" → "normal high probability time reduction state" → "normal low probability time reduction state" → "probability fluctuation state" → "hidden probability fluctuation state" It was in a play state. On the other hand, the game specifications are set so that the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability change state", and "probability change state" are positioned as game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". You may Specifically, for example, the starting port of the first special symbol is provided upstream of the starting port of the second special symbol to which the normal electric symbol 72 is attached, and the normal electric symbol 72 is activated in the "normal game state". Because it is difficult, it is easier for the player to receive the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. The lottery opportunity of the second special pattern, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the special pattern, can be received more easily. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The display positions of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed when a right-handed suggesting display suggesting a right-handed game appears. Specifically, in the "normal game state" where the left-handed game is encouraged, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" and the like, while the indication of hitting to the right is displayed in the right small area Ds3, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications corresponding to the game state.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbols is mainly performed. It is configured so that it is not performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the effects of a plurality of symbols (for example, special symbols and normal symbols) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed depends on the game state, game specifications, the game value to be given, or the execution frequency. is provided in advance, and the performance corresponding to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the performance with the low priority, the scale of the performance is reduced, or the performance itself is not executed, etc. Compared to the performance with the high priority, the player It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol, which has a lower gaming value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol, is displayed as the first special symbol. When the 3-symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 is not executed or the scale of the performance is reduced and displayed, or when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of normal symbols having a low game value that can be given to the player may be displayed by not executing it on the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 or by reducing the scale of the effect. By configuring in this way, the player does not feel annoyed by preferentially executing an effect that the player wants to recognize when playing the game, and by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the effect with a low priority. can perform the performance.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the sound ramp control device 113, when any stop type command is received, the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON. However, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON when each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when any of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, each variation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON at the timing of receiving each variation pattern command. In this case, in the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed on the display control device based on the fact that each variation start flag 223a, 223b is turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of each stop type command by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is provided with each variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on each display variation pattern command. can be executed. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving each stop type command. , may be transmitted to the display control device 114 . Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Also, a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or may be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 . Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a role that operates according to various effects, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by activating the role in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10 A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the special pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Also, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. By making the main control device 110 perform the winning judgment and the lottery processing at the start of the variation, the voice lamp control device 113 performing the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 performing the variation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 or a combination thereof) may be changed to prepare a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. may be set to In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the variation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be given an expectation that a big win will finally be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 adds "1" when there is a prize (starting prize) to the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a. In response to the pending ball number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number, each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer accompanying the start winning is included as it is, to the audio lamp control device 113. Although the case of transmission has been described, the types of counters included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113 . As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, You may store in RAM223.

In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64, the second upper starting port 71, or the second lower starting port 71a and the passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times. , The maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port. The maximum number of balls held in the mouth may be any number other than "4". Also, the maximum number of held balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or , The areas divided into four may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) by the number of reserved balls. It may be configured such that the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

It should be noted that the slot machine is a well-known system in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, and the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to have a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then confirms and displays the identification information. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller instead of the prize ball number table, and functions equivalent to the role ratio management chip or the role ratio management chip. , the number of wins (symbols aligned on the activated line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of wins during the bonus game period, and the AT period. The number of wins may be counted to manage the role ratio and the continuous role ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown. It should be noted that each of the various inventive concepts described below may add a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept, or add a part or a plurality of the configurations of the other inventive concept. The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging parts or the like.

<Group A: No specific effect is performed during the game result suggestive effect>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Display means (for example, third pattern display device 81) predetermined production execution means (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) can be executed (for example, sound lamp control device 113 or display control In a gaming machine comprising a device 114),
The predetermined effect execution means is
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a game result suggestive effect (for example, a variable effect of special symbols) capable of suggesting the game result to the player;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) with a different occurrence condition from the game result suggesting effect;
Continuing means for continuing the game result suggesting effect (for example, continuing the variable effect of special symbols) when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is satisfied during the execution of the game result suggesting effect,
Specific effect waiting means (for example, Standby for right-handed instruction 81d (text message 81f) for production during variable production of special symbols,
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine A0 is characterized in that the specific effect whose start is on standby by the specific effect waiting means can be executed on condition that at least the game result suggesting effect is completed.

According to the game machine A0, information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means , wherein the predetermined effect execution means is a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a game result suggestion effect capable of suggesting a game result to the player; specific effect execution means capable of executing a different specific effect; continuation means for continuing the game result suggestive effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is met during execution of the game result suggestive effect; specific effect waiting means for waiting for the start of the specific effect at least during execution of the game result suggesting effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect. The specific effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect whose start is on standby by the specific effect standby means, at least on condition that the game result suggesting effect is completed. As a result, even when a condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the start of the specific performance can be put on standby, and the player pays attention to the game result suggesting performance being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to enjoy the game without spoiling it, and that the interest of the game result suggestion effect can be improved. In addition, since the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the game result effect is completed, the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without any sense of incongruity, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased. , has the effect of

In gaming machine A0,
When the start of the specific effect is on standby by the specific effect waiting means, a related effect (for example, a right hitting notification lamp 37c or a main display right hitting A game machine A1 characterized by comprising a related effect executing means for executing an instruction 89).

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, there is provided a related effect executing means for executing a related effect capable of suggesting a game situation related to the specific effect to the player when the start of the specific effect is on standby by the specific effect standby means. . Thus, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are satisfied and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the specific performance. becomes possible. Therefore, even when a condition for starting a specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect, the start of the specific effect can be put on standby (suspended), and the player can proceed to the game result suggesting effect being executed. It is possible to enjoy without losing the attention of the player, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the start of the specific performance is waiting by the related performance, and the player is waiting for the specific performance. Since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggestive performance is completed while making the player recognize that, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without discomfort.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The specific production is
The game machine A2 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state will change. As a result, during execution of the game result suggesting effect, the player can easily pay attention to the game result suggesting effect that is being executed by making it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can shift. It is possible to improve interest by means of a game result suggestive performance, and to make it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed by the specific performance after that, so that the player can accurately recognize the contents of the game. There is

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The related effect execution means is
A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect in the display means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect on the display means. As a result, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are established and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance can suggest the game situation related to the specific performance to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the specific performance is not immediately performed, but the related performance is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the specific performance, and the game is played. The player can fully enjoy the game result suggesting performance being executed without losing his or her attention. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the specific effect is waiting by executing the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect so that the player can see the specific effect. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that he/she is on standby, and the content of the game can be accurately recognized.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device 81 displays a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (character message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the specific performance). displayed at the same time).

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the specific performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even during execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the player can accurately recognize the content of the game between the specific performance and the related performance. Further, by continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether the specific performance is executed or not, and the control load can be reduced. , has the effect of

In gaming machines A0 to A4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the game result suggesting effect.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A0 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestive effect execution means converts the result of the first lottery or the second lottery into the game result. It is configured to be suggestible to the player in the suggestive effect. As a result, the start of the specific performance is suspended even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during the game result suggestion performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery. As a result, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting effect being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the game result suggesting effect can be performed. Amusement can be improved, and since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player can recognize the contents of the specific performance without discomfort. There is

In any of gaming machines A0 to A5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to, as the specific effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, even when the condition for starting the specific effect that can suggest to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during execution of the game result suggesting effect is met, the start of the specific effect can be suspended. Thus, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting performance under execution without losing attention, and when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player is suggested to switch the shooting mode. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine A6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the gaming machine A7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game It is possible to make the player immediately recognize that the second shooting mode is not recommended in the state, and to facilitate the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine A6 or A7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the game result suggesting effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to wait (suspend) the start of a specific effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state will be transferred, and the player can use it as a game result suggesting effect being executed. It is possible to enjoy the result of the first lottery or the second lottery without losing attention to it, to increase interest in the game result suggesting performance, and to execute the game result suggesting performance. Since the specific effect can be executed when the is finished, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the transition to the second game state has occurred without a sense of incompatibility.

<Group B: No specific effect is performed during the suggestive display suggesting the game situation>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group B was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Display means (for example, third pattern display device 81) predetermined production execution means (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) can be executed (for example, sound lamp control device 113 or display control In a gaming machine comprising a device 114),
The predetermined effect execution means is
a suggestive display execution means capable of displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting the game situation to the player (for example, a variable effect of special symbols);
a specific effect executing means capable of displaying a specific effect (for example, a right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) having different display conditions from the suggestive display;
a predetermined period display means (for example, a variation pattern command) capable of displaying the suggestive display for at least a predetermined period;
suggestive display termination means (for example, a confirmation command) for terminating the suggestive display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed;
When the display condition for starting the specific effect is established within the predetermined period, at least during the predetermined period, the specific effect non-starting means (for example, during the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol) that does not start the specific effect does not start the right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for production),
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine B0 is configured to be able to execute the specific effect when the suggestive display is terminated by the suggestive display ending means and the conditions for executing the specific effect are satisfied.

According to the game machine B0, information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means , wherein the predetermined effect execution means includes a suggestive display execution means capable of displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting a game situation to the player, and a specific effect having display conditions different from the suggestive display a predetermined period display means capable of displaying the suggestive display for at least a predetermined period of time; a suggestive display termination means for terminating the suggestive display after the elapse of the predetermined period of time; and the predetermined period of time a specific effect non-starting means that does not start the specific effect for at least the predetermined period when a display condition that allows the specific effect to start is satisfied within the specified period, wherein the specific effect executing means performs the suggestion When the suggestive display is ended by the display ending means, the specific effect can be executed when the conditions for executing the specific effect are satisfied. As a result, even when an execution condition for starting a specific performance is met during execution of the suggestive display, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player clearly recognizes the content of the suggestive display being displayed. There is an effect that the content of the game can be grasped clearly. In addition, since the specific performance can be executed when the suggestive display ends, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased. There is

In gaming machine B0,
The suggestive display executing means includes:
A game machine B1 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the suggestive display with a fixed execution time (for example, "60 seconds") when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition is established.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive display executing means is configured to be capable of executing the suggestive display whose execution time is fixed when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition is satisfied. As a result, the execution time of the suggestive display that is executed when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition of the specific effect is met is fixed, and during the execution of the suggestive display that is executed in the fixed execution time, When execution conditions for the specific performance are established, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the content of the suggestive display being displayed can be clearly recognized by the player in a fixed execution time, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp the contents of the In addition, since the specific performance can be executed when the suggestive display, which is a fixed execution time, ends, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without discomfort, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased. There is an effect that it can be increased.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
In a situation where the specific effect is not started by the specific effect non-starting means, a related effect (for example, a main display right-hand hitting instruction 89) capable of suggesting to the player a game situation related to the specific effect can be executed. The game machine B2 is characterized by comprising a related effect executing means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, in a situation where the specific effect is not started by the specific effect non-starting means, there is provided a related effect execution means capable of executing a related effect capable of suggesting to the player a game situation related to the specific effect. . As a result, even when the display conditions for the specific effect are satisfied and the specific effect is not started while the suggestive display is being displayed, it is possible to suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific effect by means of the related effect. becomes. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is satisfied while the suggestive display is being displayed, the start of the specific effect can be put on standby (suspended), and the player loses attention to the suggestive display being displayed. It is possible to clearly recognize the contents without being overwhelmed, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the start of the specific performance is waiting by the related performance, and the player is waiting for the specific performance. Since the specific effect can be executed when the display of the suggestive display ends while making the player recognize that, the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without discomfort.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B2,
The specific production is
The game machine B3 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state will change. As a result, while the suggestive display is being displayed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state can shift, so that the player can easily pay attention to the suggestive display being displayed and the suggestive display can be performed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the contents of the game, and to make it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be shifted by a specific performance after that, and to make the player accurately recognize the contents of the game. has the effect of

In game machine B2 or B3,
The related effect execution means is
A game machine B4 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect in the display means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect on the display means. As a result, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are satisfied and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance can suggest the game situation related to the specific performance to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is established during the display of the suggestive display, the specific effect is not immediately performed, but the related effect is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the specific effect, so that the player can It is possible to make the user recognize the display contents of the suggestive display being displayed without hindrance. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the specific effect is waiting by executing the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect so as not to be conspicuous. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that he/she is on standby, and the content of the game can be accurately recognized.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B4,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device 81 displays a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (character message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the specific performance). displayed at the same time).

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the specific performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even during execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the player can accurately recognize the content of the game between the specific performance and the related performance. Further, by continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether the specific performance is executed or not, and the control load can be reduced. , has the effect of

In gaming machines B0 to B5,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestive display executing means includes:
The game machine B6 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the suggestion display.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to BA3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the first lottery and the second lottery, wherein the suggestive display execution means displays the result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the suggestive display. is configured to be suggestible to the player. Thus, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during the suggestive display executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, the start of the specific performance can be suspended. To improve interest in the suggestive display by making it possible for the player to enjoy the suggestive display during execution without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be. In addition, since the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the suggestive display is finished, the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without any sense of incongruity.

In game machines B0 to B6,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to, as the specific effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during the display of the suggestive display is established, the start of the specific effect can be postponed, The player can fully enjoy the suggestive display being executed without losing his/her attention, and by suggesting the player to switch the shooting mode when the execution of the suggestive display is finished, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to switch the firing mode without discomfort.

In gaming machine B7,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, a game machine B8 characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game It is possible to make the player immediately recognize that the second shooting mode is not recommended in the state, and to facilitate the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine B7 or B8,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine B9 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7 or B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the suggestive display executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery is predetermined. Even if the number of times is reached, the start of the specific performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be transferred can be put on hold, and the player receives the first lottery or the second lottery as a suggestion display during execution. To enhance interest in the suggestive display and to execute a specific performance when execution of the suggestive display is finished. , the player can recognize that the game state has shifted to the second game state without a sense of incompatibility.

<Group C: No specific effect is performed during the game result suggestive effect>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group C have been made in view of the above circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined effect execution means is
Effect continuation means (for example, executing a variable effect according to a variable pattern command) that continues a game result suggesting effect that can suggest a game result to a player at least until the execution trigger of a predetermined event (for example, reception of a confirmation command). ,
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) capable of suggesting the occurrence of a predetermined game state (for example, "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state") to the player When,
During execution of the game result suggestive effect, even if an occurrence condition (for example, reaching the ceiling) that can suggest to the player that the specific effect will occur is satisfied, the game result suggestive effect is executed. A production non-starting means that does not start a specific production (for example, does not start the production right hitting instruction 81d (text message 81f) during the fluctuation production of the first special symbol),
The specific effect execution means is
Switching means for switching from the game result suggesting effect to the specific effect when the execution opportunity for the predetermined event arrives (for example, switching from the special symbol fluctuation effect screen to the effect right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f)), A gaming machine C0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means and wherein the predetermined effect execution means includes effect continuation means for continuing a game result suggesting effect capable of suggesting a game result to the player at least until a trigger for executing a predetermined event, and a predetermined game state. and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect capable of suggesting to the player that a and a performance non-starting means that does not start the specific performance during execution of the game result suggestive performance even if the game result suggestive performance is being executed, and the specific performance executing means is configured to prevent the game A switching means for switching from result suggesting performance to the specific performance is provided. As a result, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player can continue to perform the game result suggestive performance. It is possible to enjoy the game without losing its attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance suggesting the game result, and it is possible to switch to a specific performance and execute it after the timing of execution of a predetermined event arrives. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can recognize the content of the specific presentation without a sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine C0,
A game state means capable of generating a normal game state (for example, "normal game state") different from the predetermined game state,
The predetermined gaming state is
The game machine C1 is characterized in that it is in a game state more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it comprises game state means capable of generating a normal game state different from the predetermined game state, and the predetermined game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. As a result, when a condition for starting a specific performance capable of suggesting to the player that a predetermined game state, which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, will occur is established during execution of the game result suggesting performance. Also, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player can enjoy the game result suggesting performance in execution without impairing the attention of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game result suggesting performance. In addition, after an opportunity to execute a predetermined event has arrived, by switching to a specific effect and executing it, it is possible to suggest to the player that a predetermined game state that is advantageous to the player occurs. There is an effect that the player can recognize the occurrence of the predetermined game state without discomfort.

In gaming machine C0 or C1,
A detection means (for example, a first starter switch) capable of detecting game media passing through a predetermined area,
The predetermined event is
A game machine C2 characterized in that the event is triggered by the detection of a game medium by the detection means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, a detection means capable of detecting a game medium passing through a predetermined area is provided, and the predetermined event is an event triggered by the detection of the game medium by the detection means. As a result, even when a condition for starting a specific performance is satisfied during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player can follow the game result suggesting performance in execution. It is possible to enjoy the game without losing its attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game result suggestion effect, and an event triggered by the detection of the game medium passing through the predetermined area by the detection means is eliminated. After arriving, it is possible to switch to the specific effect and execute it, so that there is an effect that the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without a sense of incompatibility.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
When the specific effect is not started by the effect non-starting means, a related effect (for example, the right-handed notification lamp 37c or the main display right-handed instruction 89) that can suggest the game situation related to the specific effect to the player ), a game machine C3 characterized by comprising a related effect execution means for executing.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, there is provided a related performance executing means for executing a related performance capable of suggesting a game situation related to the specific performance to the player when the specific performance is not started by the performance non-starting means. Thus, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are established and the specific performance is not started during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the specific performance. becomes possible. Therefore, even when the condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the specific performance can not be started, and the player loses attention to the game result suggesting performance being executed. It is possible to enjoy the game without having to worry about it, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the start of the specific performance is waiting by the related performance, and to make the player recognize that the specific performance is waiting. Since the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the game result suggestive effect is finished, the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without any sense of incongruity.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C3,
The specific production is
The game machine C4 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state will change. As a result, during execution of the game result suggesting effect, the player can easily pay attention to the game result suggesting effect that is being executed by making it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can shift. It is possible to improve interest by means of a game result suggestive performance, and to make it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed by the specific performance after that, so that the player can accurately recognize the contents of the game. There is

In gaming machine C3 or C4,
The related effect execution means is
A game machine C5 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect in the display means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect on the display means. As a result, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are established and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance can suggest the game situation related to the specific performance to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the specific performance is not immediately performed, but the related performance is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the specific performance, and the game is played. The player can fully enjoy the game result suggesting performance being executed without losing his or her attention. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the specific effect is waiting by executing the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect so that the player can see the specific effect. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that he/she is on standby, and the content of the game can be accurately recognized.

In any of game machines C3 to C5,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device 81 displays a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (character message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the specific performance). (displayed at the same time).

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the specific performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even during execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the player can accurately recognize the content of the game between the specific performance and the related performance. Further, by continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed, and the control load can be reduced. , has the effect of

In any of gaming machines C0 to C6,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the game result suggesting effect.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestive effect execution means converts the result of the first lottery or the second lottery into the game result. It is configured to be suggestible to the player in the suggestive effect. As a result, the start of the specific performance is suspended even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during the game result suggestion performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery. As a result, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting effect being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the game result suggesting effect can be performed. Amusement can be improved, and since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player can recognize the contents of the specific performance without discomfort. There is

In any of gaming machines C0 to C7,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to, as the specific effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, even when the condition for starting the specific effect that can suggest to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during execution of the game result suggesting effect is met, the start of the specific effect can be suspended. Thus, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting performance under execution without losing attention, and when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player is suggested to switch the shooting mode. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine C8,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine C9 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In game machine C8 or C9,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine C10 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the game result suggesting effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to wait (suspend) the start of a specific effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state will be transferred, and the player can use it as a game result suggesting effect being executed. It is possible to enjoy the result of the first lottery or the second lottery without losing attention to it, to increase interest in the game result suggesting performance, and to execute the game result suggesting performance. Since the specific effect can be executed when the is finished, the player can recognize that the game state has shifted to the second game state without a sense of discomfort.

<D Group: Even if the game state transitions during execution of the transition suggestive effect, continue the transition suggestive effect>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group D was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
When the first event (for example, special symbol fluctuation effect) is executed for the first number of times (for example, "900 times") in the first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state), the first game state A game state transition means (for example, time reduction low probability flag 203n) that can shift to a different second game state (for example, "ordinary figure low probability time reduction state"),
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a transition suggestive effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) performed before the first game state can be shifted to the second game state;
During the execution of the transition suggestive effect, even after the game state transition means transitions from the first game state to the second game state, effect continuation means (for example, ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of continuing the transition suggestive effect continues execution of the ceiling reaching notification performance even if the ceiling is reached during the execution of the game machine D0.

According to the gaming machine D0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring constant information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means. and a game state transition means capable of transitioning to a second game state different from the first game state when a first event is executed a first number of times in a first game state; Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a transition suggestion performance performed before a transition from the first game state to the second game state can be performed; A performance continuation means capable of continuing the transition suggesting performance even after the game state is shifted to the second game state is provided. As a result, even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggesting effect, the transition suggesting effect can be continued. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing attention to the transition suggestive performance being executed, and can easily recognize the situation of the game accurately to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D0,
A post-transition effect execution means capable of executing a post-transition effect (for example, a right-hand hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) performed after execution of the transition suggesting effect,
The post-transition production is
The game state transition means is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state has shifted to the second game state,
The game machine D1 is characterized in that the post-transition effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing the post-transition effect on condition that the transition suggestive effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, post-transition effect execution means capable of executing a post-transition effect to be performed after execution of the transition suggesting effect is provided, and the post-transition effect is performed when the game state shifts to the second game state by the game state transition means. The post-transition effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the post-transition effect on the condition that the transition suggestive effect has ended. As a result, even after the game state transition means shifts from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggesting performance, the transition suggesting performance is continued, and after the transition suggesting performance is executed, the second game is executed. The player can be made to recognize that the state has been changed by the post-transition effect. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing attention to the transition suggestive performance being executed, and recognize that the game state has been shifted to the second game state by the post-transition performance. This has the effect of making it easier to accurately recognize the state of the game and improving the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine D0 or D1,
The transition suggestion production is
The game machine D2 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transition suggestive effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can shift, the transition suggesting performance is continued. can be continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game state can be changed without losing attention to the change suggesting performance being executed, and the game situation can be easily recognized accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In any one of the game machines D0 to D2,
The transition suggestion production is
The game machine D3 is characterized by a situation presentation capable of suggesting the game situation in the first game state to the player.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transition suggestive effect is a situation effect capable of suggesting the game situation in the first game state to the player. As a result, even after the transition from the first game state to the second game state is performed by the game state transition means during the execution of the transition suggestion effect which is the situation effect capable of suggesting the game situation in the first game state to the player, The transition suggesting production can be continued. Therefore, the player can recognize the game situation in the first game state without losing attention to the transition suggesting performance being executed, and the game situation can be easily recognized accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In any of gaming machines D0 to D3,
Advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player when a specific result (e.g., jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect,
The game state transition means is
A game machine D4 characterized by comprising a non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result (for example, transitioning to "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling).

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D0 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect, and the game state transition means is adapted to generate the specific result. non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the As a result, it is possible to change the game state without going through an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the game state can change without deriving the specific result, there is an effect that the contents can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the transition suggestion performance.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, wherein the suggestion effect execution means changes the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the transition suggestion. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player in the performance. As a result, even when the condition for starting the post-transition performance is satisfied during the transition suggestive performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, the start of the post-transition performance is suspended. The player can enjoy the transition suggesting performance being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the interest of the transition suggesting performance. In addition, since the post-transition performance can be executed when the execution of the transition suggesting performance is completed, the player can recognize the content of the post-transition performance without discomfort. There is

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D5,
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). , and
The post-transition production execution means includes:
A game characterized by executing, as the post-transition effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium can be fired in a first shooting mode and a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. An effect capable of suggesting the player to switch from the first shooting mode or the second shooting mode to the second shooting mode or the first shooting mode is executed. Thus, the start of the post-transition performance is suspended even when the conditions for starting the post-transition performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during execution of the transition suggesting performance are established. This allows the player to enjoy the transition suggesting performance under execution without losing attention, and suggests the player to switch the shooting mode when the execution of the transition suggesting performance is finished. As a result, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine D6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine D7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In any one of gaming machines D5 to D7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine D8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machines D5 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. As a result, in the first game state, during the transition suggestive effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means is increased by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times has been reached, the start of the post-transition effect capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state will be shifted can be suspended, and the player can select the first lottery or It is possible to fully enjoy the result of the second lottery without losing attention to how the result of the second lottery will be, and it is possible to enhance interest in the transition suggesting performance, and the transition is made when the execution of the transition suggesting performance is finished. Since the post-effect can be executed, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the transition to the second game state has occurred without a sense of incongruity.

<Group E: Even if the game state transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is not terminated in the middle>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group E was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
In the first game state, when a first event that can occur in the first game state occurs, the game state can shift to a second game state in which a situation in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player can occur. Transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) that can be started on the condition that the game state is the first game state;
During the execution of the first effect, when the game state transition means transitions to the second game state, the effect continuation means (for example, during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, (continuing the ceiling reaching notification performance being executed even when the ceiling is reached).

According to the gaming machine E0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means. and , in a first game state, when a first event that can occur in the first game state occurs, a situation in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player. A game state transition means capable of shifting to the second game state, a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect that can be started on condition that the game state is the first game state, and during execution of the first effect, and an effect continuation means capable of continuing the first effect when the game state is transferred to the second game state by the game state transfer means. Thus, during the execution of the first performance that can be started under the condition that the game state is the first game state, the first performance is continued even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state. can be made Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing attention to the first performance being executed, and can easily recognize the situation of the game accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. , has the effect of

In gaming machine E0,
A second effect different from the first effect, which can suggest to the player that the game state is shifted by the game state transition means (for example, a right-hand hitting instruction 89 for main display) can be executed. a second production executing means,
The second production execution means is
The game machine E1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the second effect in a situation where the first effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect and capable of suggesting to the player that the game state is shifted by the game state transition means, The second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect in a situation where the first effect is being executed. Thus, during the execution of the first performance that can be started under the condition that the game state is the first game state, the first performance is continued even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state. In addition, the second effect can be executed in a situation where the first effect is being executed. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance without losing attention to the first performance being executed, and the second performance can be executed while the first performance is being executed. By constructing and making a suggestion by means of the second effect, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to accurately recognize the situation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine E0 or E1,
The first production is
A shift suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the first game state can be shifted to the second game state (for example, from the "normal game state" to the "normal low probability time reduction state" in the ceiling reaching notification effect A game machine E2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting a shift.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is configured to be capable of executing a transition suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be shifted from the first game state to the second game state. As a result, during the execution of the first effect that can be started under the condition that the game state is the first game state, even after the game state shift means shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the game state is changed from the first game state. It is possible to continue the first performance, which is a transition suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be shifted to the second game state, and to execute the second performance in a situation where the first performance is being executed. can. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance without losing attention to the first performance being executed, and the second performance can be executed while the first performance is being executed. By constructing and making a suggestion by means of the second effect, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to accurately recognize the situation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E2,
Advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player when a specific result (e.g., jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect,
The game state transition means is
A gaming machine E3 characterized by comprising non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result (for example, transition to "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling).

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect, and the game state transition means is adapted to generate the specific result. non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the As a result, it is possible to change the game state without going through an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the game state may change without deriving the specific result, there is an effect that the contents can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E3,
While the first effect is continued by the effect continuation means, a related effect (for example, a right-handed notification lamp 37c or a right-handed instruction for main display) that can suggest a game situation related to the second effect to the player 89).

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it comprises a related performance execution means for executing a related performance capable of suggesting a game situation related to the second performance to the player while the first performance is continued by the performance continuation means. Thus, even when the conditions for generating the second performance are satisfied and the second performance is not started during the execution of the first performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the second performance. It becomes possible to Therefore, even when the condition for starting the second performance is established during the execution of the first performance, the second performance cannot be started, and the player's attention to the first performance being executed is lost. The related performance enables the player to recognize that the start of the second performance is waiting, and the player recognizes that the second performance is waiting. Since the second effect can be executed when the execution of the first effect is completed while the second effect is being performed, the player can recognize the contents of the specific effect without a sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine E4,
The related effect execution means is
A game machine E5 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the second effect in the display means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the second effect on the display means. Thus, even when the condition for generating the second performance is satisfied and the second performance is on standby during the execution of the first performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the second performance. becomes possible. Therefore, even when the condition for starting the second performance is established during execution of the first performance, the second performance is not immediately performed, and the related performance is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the second performance. , the player can fully enjoy the first performance being executed without losing his or her attention. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the second effect is waiting by executing the related effect so as not to stand out in a display area smaller than the display area of the second effect. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the 2nd effect is waiting, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the content of the game.

In gaming machine E4 or E5,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device is provided with a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (text message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the second performance). 81 at the same time).

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4 or E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the second performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even while the second performance is being executed, so that there is an effect that the player can be made to accurately recognize the contents of the game by the second performance and the related performance. . By continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the second performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether or not the second performance is executed, thereby reducing the control load. has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines E0 to E6,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestive effect execution means outputs the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the first lottery. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player in the performance. Thus, the start of the second performance is suspended even when the condition for starting the second performance is established during the first performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery. The player can enjoy the first performance being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the interest of the first performance. In addition, since the second performance can be executed when the execution of the first performance ends, the player can recognize the contents of the second performance without discomfort. There is

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E7,
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). , and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine E8.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game medium is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting the game medium in a first shooting mode and a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode, and the second effect execution means performs the second effect as the second effect. An effect capable of suggesting the player to switch from the first shooting mode or the second shooting mode to the second shooting mode or the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, the start of the second performance is postponed even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode of the shooting means should be switched during the execution of the first performance is established. This enables the player to enjoy the first performance under execution without losing his/her attention, and suggests to the player the switching of the shooting mode when the execution of the first performance is finished. As a result, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine E8,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the gaming machine E9 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine E8 or E9,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine E10 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8 or E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, the start of the second effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state is to be shifted can be put on standby (suspended), and the player can wait (suspend) the second effect as the first effect being executed. The result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be enjoyed without losing attention, and the first performance can be enhanced, and the execution of the first performance is completed. Since the second effect can be executed in the case, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the transition to the second game state has occurred without a sense of incompatibility.

<F Group: Continue to extend the effect of reaching the ceiling of one special figure until the other special figure fluctuation ends>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group F was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
a first condition acquisition means (for example, the first start port 64) capable of acquiring the first condition;
a second condition acquiring means (for example, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a) capable of acquiring a second condition different from the first condition;
By establishing the first condition, the first effect executing means (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a) capable of executing the first effect (for example, ceiling reaching notification effect),
Execution period extension means that can extend the execution time of the first effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied (for example, the execution period of the ceiling reaching notification effect is extended by the dynamic display of the second special symbol) extension), and a game machine F0.

According to the gaming machine F0, information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means and a gaming machine comprising: first condition acquisition means capable of acquiring a first condition; second condition acquisition means capable of acquiring a second condition different from the first condition; and a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect when satisfied; an execution period extending means capable of extending the execution time of the first effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied; It has As a result, it is possible to extend the execution period of the first effect when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the contents of the first performance without the content of the first performance being hindered due to the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine F0,
The first production is
The game machine F1 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, it is possible to extend the execution period of the first effect, which can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed, if the second condition is satisfied. A first performance capable of suggesting whether or not to shift to a player ends in the middle based on the establishment of a second condition, or the content of the first performance is hindered based on the establishment of the second condition. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the game state is to be changed without being changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
a means for counting the number of times the second condition is satisfied (for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e);
The execution period extending means is
The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the execution period of the first effect can be extended according to the number of times the second condition is satisfied counted by the number-of-when-satisfaction counting means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution period extending means is capable of counting the number of times the second condition is satisfied, and the execution period extending means is configured to calculate the number of times the second condition is satisfied in accordance with the number of times the second condition is satisfied counted by the satisfaction number counting means. It is configured so that the execution period of one performance can be extended. As a result, the execution period of the first effect can be extended according to the number of times the second condition is satisfied. A player can be made to clearly recognize the content of the first performance without hindering the content of the first performance based on the establishment of two conditions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2,
A second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a right-handed hitting instruction 81d for effect) different from the first effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The second production is
The game machine F3 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided when the second condition is satisfied, and the second effect is the game state that the game state can shift to. It is a production that can be suggested to. As a result, when the second effect, which can be executed by the establishment of the second condition and can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed, is executed, the execution period of the first effect can be extended. Since it is possible, for example, it is possible to suppress the suggestion that the game state is shifted by the second effect before the first effect that was executed earlier, or to suppress the content of the first effect that was executed earlier. To allow a player to clearly recognize the contents of the first performance without being hindered by the second performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F3,
While the first effect is being executed, when the game state can shift (for example, winning a big hit with the second special symbol) due to the establishment of the second condition, the first effect or the second A third effect executing means capable of executing a third effect (for example, a variation of the jackpot) different from the effect,
The third production is
The game machine F4 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game state can shift due to the establishment of the second condition while the first effect is being executed, a third effect different from the first effect or the second effect can be executed. A third effect executing means is provided, and the third effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed. Thus, while the first effect is being executed, when the game state can shift due to the establishment of the second condition, the third effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can shift is executed. Thus, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed even during execution of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly suggest to the player that the game state can be changed, provide an easy-to-understand effect, and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning to the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
A second lottery execution means (for example, the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a that can execute the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) when the second condition is satisfied ) and
A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when the first condition is satisfied, second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when the second condition is satisfied, and A simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time is provided. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machines F3 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to, as the second effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. As a result, the start of the second performance is postponed even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode of the shooting means should be switched during the execution of the first performance is established. This enables the player to enjoy the first performance under execution without losing his/her attention, and suggests to the player the switching of the shooting mode when the execution of the first performance is finished. As a result, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without any sense of incongruity.

In the game machine F6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine F7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In the game machine F6 or F7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine F8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6 or F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, the start of the second effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state will be transferred can be suspended, and the player can select the first lottery or the second effect as the first effect being executed. It is possible to fully enjoy the result of the second lottery without losing attention to how the result of the second lottery will be, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the first performance, and when the execution of the first performance is finished, the second lottery is displayed. Since the 2nd effect can be executed, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the transition to the second game state has occurred without a sense of incongruity.

<G group: End the special figure 1 fluctuation effect on the liquid crystal with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation that reaches the ceiling>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group G was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a variable effect of special symbols) on a display device (for example, a third symbol display device 81),
A counting means (eg, ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of first events (eg, dynamic display of the first special symbol);
a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect performed immediately before reaching the ceiling) capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when a second event occurs;
During the execution of the first effect, if a third event based on the counting result of the counting means (e.g. reaching the ceiling based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol) occurs, the effect of ending the first effect. A gaming machine G0 characterized by comprising end means (for example, ending the ceiling reaching notification effect at the timing when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is finished during the ceiling reaching notification effect).

According to the gaming machine D0, information obtaining means capable of obtaining predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information obtained by the information obtaining means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a counting means capable of counting the number of first events; It is provided with one performance execution means and a performance end means for ending the first performance when a third event based on the counting result of the counting means occurs during the execution of the first performance. As a result, the first effect being executed can be terminated by the occurrence of the third event based on the counting result of the counting means during the execution of the first effect. When a change in content or a change in game situation can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the game can be shifted to a game based on the third event. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine G0,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, various effects in the "normal pattern low probability time shortened state"),
The second production execution means is
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the second effect can be executed when the first effect ends by the effect ending means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means. It is configured to be able to execute production. As a result, when the third event occurs during execution of the first effect, the first effect being executed can be terminated, and when the first effect ends, the second effect can be executed. , it is possible to immediately terminate the first effect and execute the second effect when the content of the effect or the game situation may change. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation by the second effect to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G1,
The second production is
The game machine G2 is characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, the occurrence of the third event during the execution of the first performance causes the first performance being executed to end, suggesting to the player that the game state can shift when the first performance ends. Since the possible second performance can be executed, the first performance is immediately ended when the game state can be changed, and the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed is executed. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest to the player that the game state can be immediately changed by the second effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The second production execution means is
A gaming machine G3 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition. As a result, when the third event occurs during execution of the first effect, the first effect being executed can be terminated. When a change can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the second effect based on the third event can be executed. Therefore, when the third event is established, the second effect is immediately executed to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G3,
A period setting means (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of setting the executable period of the first effect,
The production ending means
A game characterized in that the first effect can be terminated by the occurrence of the third event before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. Machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises a period setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect can be executed, and the effect ending means is arranged before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. The first effect can be terminated when the third event occurs. As a result, the third event occurs prior to the elapse of the executable period of the first effect, and the first effect can be terminated. or when a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect that could still be continued is ended and the game is shifted to the game based on the occurrence of the third event that is established before the executable period elapses. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G4,
First lottery execution means (for example, winning to first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery based on the first event (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol);
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a) capable of executing the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) based on the third event )When,
A gaming machine G5 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first event, a second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery based on the third event, the first lottery and the second lottery Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the lottery. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine G6.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to, as the second effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during the execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine G6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine G7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine G6 or G7,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine G8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6 or G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means includes second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when the counting means counts a predetermined number of times in the first game state. Thus, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<H Group: If the other special symbol hits the ceiling during the ceiling reaching effect of one special symbol, the ceiling reaching effect is ended in the middle>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group H have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to games.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display device (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
At least, calculation means (for example, ceiling reaching count counter 203p) capable of calculating that the first condition (for example, special symbol fluctuation effect) is established,
a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when the first condition is satisfied;
During the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculation means, the effect ending means for ending the first effect when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the movement of the second special symbol during the ceiling reaching notification effect The gaming machine H0 is characterized in that the ceiling reaching notification performance is terminated at the timing when the target display is terminated.

According to the gaming machine H0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a game machine comprising at least calculating means capable of calculating that a first condition is established, and execution of a first effect capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when the first condition is established. possible first performance execution means; and performance end means for terminating the first performance when a second condition is established during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means. . As a result, when the second condition is met during execution of the first effect based on the calculation results of the calculating means, the first effect being executed can be terminated. When a change in the contents of the performance or a change in the game situation can occur, the first performance can be terminated immediately and the game situation can be shifted to the game situation based on the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H0,
The second condition is
A game machine H1 characterized in that it is configured such that the first condition is less likely to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second condition is configured to be more difficult to be satisfied than the first condition. As a result, the second condition, which is less likely to be satisfied than the first condition, is met during the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculating means, so that the first effect being executed can be terminated. When a second condition, which is less likely to occur than the first condition, is satisfied and a change in performance contents or a game situation can occur, the first performance is immediately terminated according to the rare case, and the game is played based on the second condition. situation can be transferred. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H0 or H1,
at least dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information on said display means when said first condition is satisfied;
The first production execution means is
The game machine H2 is characterized in that the first effect can be executed over a plurality of the dynamic displays.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means when the first condition is established, and the first effect execution means executes the first effect by a plurality of Enabled over said dynamic display. As a result, when the second condition is met during the execution of the first effect that is executed over a plurality of dynamic displays, the first effect that is being executed can be terminated. When the second condition is established in a situation where the first performance is executed over the target display and a change in performance contents or a game situation may occur, the first performance is immediately terminated and the second condition is set. It is possible to shift to the game situation based on. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of the game machines H0 to H2,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, various effects in the "normal pattern low probability time shortened state"),
The second production execution means is
The game machine H3 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means. It is configured to be able to execute production. As a result, when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculating means, the first effect being executed can be terminated, and when the second condition is satisfied, the content of the effect can be changed. When a change or a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the second effect based on the second condition can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H3,
The second production is
A game machine H4 characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to a player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculation means, the first effect being executed can be terminated, and when the second condition is satisfied, the It is possible to terminate the first effect and execute a second effect that can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H3 or H4,
The second production execution means is
A game machine H5 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition. As a result, the second condition for executing the second effect is satisfied during the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculating means, so that the first effect being executed can be terminated and the second condition is satisfied. is established, the first effect can be terminated immediately, and a second effect can be executed that can suggest to the player that the game state can shift. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H5,
A period setting means (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of setting the executable period of the first effect,
The production ending means
A game characterized in that the first effect can be terminated when the second condition is satisfied before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. Machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H5, the following effects are produced. That is, it comprises a period setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect can be executed, and the effect ending means is arranged before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. When the second condition is established, the first effect can be terminated. As a result, the first effect can be terminated by satisfying the second condition before the period during which the first effect can be executed elapses. or when a change in the game situation can occur, the still continuing first performance is terminated and the game is shifted to a game based on the establishment of the second condition established before the execution possible period elapses. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H6,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning to the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first condition;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a) capable of executing the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) based on the second condition )When,
A game machine H7 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous change) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H6, the following effects are produced. That is, a first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first condition, a second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery based on the second condition, the first lottery and the second lottery. Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the lottery. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of game machines H1 to H7,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine H8.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to, as the second effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during the execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine H8,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine H9 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine H8 or H9,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is calculated by the calculation means, second game transition means (for example, time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine H10 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8 or H9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means includes second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when the predetermined number of times is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means is obtained by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<Group I: End the special figure 1 fluctuation effect on the liquid crystal with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation that reaches the ceiling>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group I was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display device (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
Transition condition determination means (for example, ceiling reaching count counter 203p) capable of determining whether or not the gaming state transitions;
a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when the game state changes;
a ball entry detection means (for example, a second starter switch) capable of detecting whether or not a game medium enters a predetermined area;
During the execution of the first effect, effect ending means for ending the first effect due to the ball entering the entering ball detecting means (for example, during the ceiling reaching notification effect, the fluctuation of the second special symbol ends The gaming machine I0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a ceiling reaching notification effect is finished at the timing of the game machine I0.

According to the gaming machine I0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a transition condition determination means capable of determining whether or not the game state transitions, and when the game state transitions, a first effect capable of suggesting the game state to the player can be executed. a first effect execution means, a ball entry detection means capable of detecting whether or not a game medium enters a predetermined area, and a ball entering the ball entry detection means during execution of the first effect. and an effect ending means for ending the first effect. As a result, during execution of the first effect that can suggest the game situation to the player, it is possible to end the first effect being executed due to the ball entering the ball detection means. The first performance can be terminated at the player's desired timing by allowing the ball to enter the ball detecting means according to his/her intention. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine I0,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, an effect for "normal pattern low probability time shortened state"),
The second production execution means is
The game machine I1 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means.

According to the gaming machine I0, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means. It is configured to be able to execute production. As a result, during the execution of the first effect that can suggest the game situation to the player, it is possible to terminate the first effect being executed due to the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means, and to immediately execute the second effect. can. Therefore, for example, by making the ball enter the ball detecting means according to the player's intention, the first effect can be terminated and the second effect can be executed at the timing desired by the player, so that the game situation can be changed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide game characteristics that can be accurately suggested to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine I1,
The second production is
A game machine I2 characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to a player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. Thus, during the execution of the first effect capable of suggesting the game situation to the player, the first effect being executed is terminated due to the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means, and the game state can be immediately changed. A second effect that can be suggested to the player can be executed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to indicate to the player that the first effect can be terminated at the timing desired by the player by causing the ball to enter the ball detecting means according to the player's intention, and that the game state can be changed. Since the second effect can be executed, there is an effect that a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player is provided, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
The second production execution means is
A gaming machine I3 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the detection of the entering ball detection means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect based on detection by the entering ball detecting means. Thus, during the execution of the first effect that can suggest the game situation to the player, the first effect being executed is terminated due to the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means, and the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means It is possible to execute a second effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can immediately shift based on this. Therefore, for example, it is possible to indicate to the player that the first effect can be terminated at the timing desired by the player by causing the ball to enter the ball detecting means according to the player's intention, and that the game state can be changed. Since the second effect can be executed, there is an effect that a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player is provided, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I3,
A period setting means (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of setting the executable period of the first effect,
The production ending means
The first effect can be terminated by entering the ball into the entering detection means before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises a period setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect can be executed, and the effect ending means is arranged before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. By entering the ball into the entering ball detection means, the first effect can be terminated. As a result, the first effect can be terminated by causing the ball to enter the ball detecting means before the executable period of the first effect elapses. When a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect that can still be continued is terminated, and the game based on the ball entering the ball entering detection means established before the executable period elapses. can be transferred. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning to the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first condition;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a) capable of executing the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) based on the second condition )When,
A gaming machine I5 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, a first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first condition, a second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery based on the second condition, the first lottery and the second lottery. Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the lottery. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to, as the second effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during the execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine I6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the gaming machine I7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine I6 or I7,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is calculated by the calculation means, second game transition means (for example, time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine I8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6 or I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means includes second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when the predetermined number of times is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means is obtained by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<J Group: When one special figure hits the ceiling while the other special figure hits the jackpot, the variation production is switched from one special figure variation presentation to the other special figure variation presentation at that timing>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group J was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display device (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
A first effect (for example, ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of suggesting to the player a first game situation based on the game by the player's predetermined operation (for example, one special pattern before reaching the ceiling 1 fluctuation). 1 performance executing means;
A second effect (for example, a big win) that is different from the first effect and can suggest to the player a second game situation (for example, at the start of a variable production that wins a big win game) different from the first game situation. a second effect execution means capable of executing a winning variation effect);
Switching means for switching from the first effect to the second effect by becoming the second game situation during the execution of the first effect (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol during the ceiling reaching notification effect) and switching to a variable performance corresponding to the big win when the game machine J0 wins.

According to the game machine E0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect capable of suggesting to the player a first game situation based on a game performed by a predetermined operation of the player; and an effect different from the first effect. a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting to the player a second game situation different from the first game situation; A switching means for switching from the first effect to the second effect is provided. As a result, when the second effect can be executed while the first effect is being executed, the first effect being executed can be switched to the second effect. In addition, there is an effect that the first performance can be immediately switched to the second performance to provide a game property in which the situation can be accurately suggested to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine J0,
The first production is
The game machine J1 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player the game situation before the second effect is started.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player the game situation before the second effect is started. Thus, during the execution of the first performance capable of suggesting to the player the game situation before the start of the second performance, the first performance being executed is switched to the second performance by the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, for example, when the game situation can change from the previous game situation, the first production is immediately switched to the second production to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the situation to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The switching means is
Even during the execution of the first performance, a third performance (for example, screen darkening performance) for forcibly stopping the first performance is performed, and the second performance can be executed after the third performance. A gaming machine J2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the switching means is configured to perform a third effect of forcibly stopping the first effect even during execution of the first effect, and to execute the second effect after the third effect. . As a result, when the game situation can change during execution of the first effect, it is possible to switch from the first effect being executed to the second effect via the third effect. When the situation can change, the first effect can be terminated immediately, and the second effect can be performed after going through the third effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the switching of the contents of the presentation, to provide the game property that can accurately suggest the situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J2,
The second production is
A game machine J3 characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to a player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, when the second condition is established during execution of the first effect, the first effect being executed can be switched to the second effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can shift. For example, when the game situation may change from the previous game situation, the first production is immediately switched to the second production to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the situation to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines J0 to J3,
The game state can be changed to at least a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
and advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when a specific result (for example, a jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect. ,
The game state transition means is
A gaming machine J4 characterized by comprising a non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result (for example, transitioning to a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling).

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, game state transition means capable of changing the game state to at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect, an advantageous state transition means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player, wherein the game state transition means is a non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result. , is equipped with As a result, it is possible to change the game state without going through an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines J0 to J4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The first production means is
The game machine J5 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the first effect.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the first lottery and the second lottery, wherein the first effect means outputs the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the first lottery. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player in the performance. Thus, when the game situation can change during the first performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, the first performance being executed can be terminated. For example, when a change in the content of the effect or a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the game situation can be shifted to the game situation based on the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J5,
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). , and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game medium is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting the game medium in a first shooting mode and a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode, and the second effect execution means performs the second effect as the second effect. An effect capable of suggesting the player to switch from the first shooting mode or the second shooting mode to the second shooting mode or the first shooting mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during the execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine J6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine J7 is characterized in that it is equipped with "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, a corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In any of game machines J5 to J7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, a time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine J8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J5 to J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means is obtained by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

For any one of the game machines A0 to A8, the game machines B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the gaming machines B0 to B9, the gaming machines A0 to A8, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines C0 to C10, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines D0 to D8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, and I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the gaming machines E0 to E10, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines F0 to F8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines G0 to G8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines H0 to H10, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines I0 to I8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H10 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines J0 to J8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to A configuration limited by any one of H10 and I0 to I8 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, J0 to J8, the gaming machine A gaming machine X1 characterized by being a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, J0 to J8, the gaming machine A gaming machine X2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, J0 to J8, the gaming machine A game machine X3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
37c Right-handed notification lamp (part of related production suggestion means)
64 First starting port (part of first lottery execution means, part of first condition acquisition means)
65 variable winning device (part of advantage means)
71 Upper second starting port (part of second lottery execution means, part of second condition acquisition means)
71a Lower second starting port (part of second lottery means, part of second condition acquisition means)
81 Third pattern display device (part of display means)
81d Direction to hit right (part of specific effect, part of post-transition effect, part of second effect, part of related effect)
81f Text message (part of specific effect, part of post-transition effect, part of second effect, part of related effect)
89 Main display right-handed instruction (part of related effect suggestion means)
112a ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of predetermined production execution means)
114 Display control device (part of predetermined effect execution means)
201 MPU (part of judgment means)
202a Special figure 2 jackpot random number table 203e Second reserved ball storage area (part of establishment number counting means)
203n Time saving low probability flag (part of game state transition means)
203p Ceiling reach count counter (part of counting means, part of calculation means, part of abnormal condition determination means)
223a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag (part of the first effect execution means)
S208 Start winning process (part of information acquisition means)
S1405 (a part of effect holding means)

Claims (1)

an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information;
determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means,
The predetermined effect execution means is
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a game result suggestive effect capable of suggesting a game result to a player;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect with different occurrence conditions from the game result suggestive effect;
a continuation means for continuing the game result suggesting effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect;
specific effect waiting means for waiting for the start of the specific effect at least during execution of the game result suggesting effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect. prepared,
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect whose start is on standby by the specific effect waiting means can be executed on condition that at least the game result suggesting effect is completed.

Images